Revit Structure 2009

Imperial Tutorials

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1

Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View . . . . . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details . . . . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section . . . . . Adding a Cantilever to a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping Beam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 27 . 32 . 35 . 47 . 49 . 55 . 59 . 62 . 63 . 65 . 66 . 70 . 73 . 75 . 79 . 82 . 84 . 98

v

Chapter 3

Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 109 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 118 . 120 . 122 . 125 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 131 . 137 . 139 . 142 . 143 . 144 . 146

Chapter 4

Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . 149 . 151 . 154

Chapter 5

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 . 162 . 167 . 171 . 173 . 180 . 182 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 188 . 194 . 196 . 199 . 201 . 205 . 216 . 224 . 229 . 236 . 239 . 241 . 246 . 249 . 250 . 257

vi | Contents

Chapter 6

Precast

Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 265 . 265

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . Changing the Beam System Properties . . . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . .

Chapter 7

Creating

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . 275 . 280 . 280 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . Importing Details from the Library . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 297 . 299 . 302 . 307 . 313 . 316 . 316 . 320 . 324 . 326 . 326

Chapter 9

Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 . 329 . 333 . 333 . 339 . 341 . 344 . 345

Chapter 10

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . 351 . 359 . 364 . 373 . 378 . 382 . 393

Chapter 11

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Contents | vii

Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . Working with Alignments and Constraints . . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 411 . 414 . 415 . 420 . 421 . 428 . 428 . 435

Chapter 12

Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 . 439 . 445 . 448 . 453 . 457

Chapter 13

Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . 461 . 468 . 474 . 474 . 475 . 476 . 480 . 481

Chapter 14

Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 486 . 494 . 496 . 505 . 507 . 509 . 512 . 514 . 531 . 534

Chapter 15

Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . 535 . 539 . 540

Chapter 16

About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 17

Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 551 . 563 . 565

viii | Contents

Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 573 . 574 . 581 . 581 . 584 . 592

Chapter 18

Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . 595 . 604 . 608 . 611 . 616

Chapter 19

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 636 . 643

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 . 648 . 657 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 665 . 667 . 670 . 672 . 673

Chapter 21

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Chapter 22

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 . 694 . 701 . 705 . 709 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 721 . 726 . 727 . 730 . 732

Chapter 23

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Contents | ix

Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 733 . 738 . 741 . 743 . 746 . 748 . 750 . 751 . 754 . 762 . 762 . 764 . 765

Chapter 24

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 . 769 . 777 . 781 . 784 . 784 . 787 . 790 . 790

x | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface. This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Structure works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

1

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Structure.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams, structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

making it easy to understand what each button represents. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. click . The Title Bar 2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. the user interface is labeled. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7 . Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. In the following illustration. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. This creates a new project based on the default template. In the steps that follow. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface. specifically its clear user interface. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. such as a 30” X 42” title block.Type: Each family can have several types. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. A type can be a specific size of a family. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). A type can also be a style. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy.

TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well. Edit. You then click the command name to run the command. While working in the drawing area. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. 8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts .By default. and View. The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. click Toolbar. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. In addition. the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view. the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu.

You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. click Beam. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.The Options Bar 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. First. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. Within the drawing area. On the left side of the Options Bar. click Design Bars. if you intend to add a beam. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9 . you can select a component type before you add it to the structural model. the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model. notice a beam type is specified. Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. 9 In the Type Selector. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the structural model. click Structural Column. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall. If you select the Beam tool. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. click Structural Wall. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice the list of columns that are available. For example. The Design Bar 10 On the Window menu. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. immediately below the Type Selector.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar. 11 Click OK. containing buttons grouped by function. There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab — commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands within a tab. click the tab. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

In the Project Browser. select Views (all).The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 11 .

so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and groups of your current project. sheets. and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. 14 On the Settings menu. click Browser Organization. elevations. reports. The browser is also dockable. families. families. schedules. double-click the name. You can right-click in the browser to add. To open a view. 13 In the Type Selector.sign next to the name. delete. 3D). scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. columns. and group name. family category (beams.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or . 12 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . walls). and rename views.

click Modify. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point." TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar. In this case. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 13 . In the bottom left corner of the window. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. click Structural Wall. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. After you create a browser organization scheme. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box. click Cancel. Do not click.You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets.

TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. You can also press SHIFT+F1. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. in conjunction with tooltips. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. The Status Bar also provides information. There are several tools that help you find information. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. 14 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . Toolbar: From the Toolbar. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and click to get the topic associated with the window. find a keyword on the Index tab.You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the tutorials. regarding selected components within a view. Windows: From any window. If there is no Help button displayed. Revit Structure Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Structure 2009 Help. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. After you are familiar with these tasks. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure In this exercise. click . When you place the cursor over a component. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area. In the Status Bar. press SHIFT+F1. press F1 to get help on that dialog. 20 Press TAB. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. You can use this tri-pane. Tooltips: To see tooltips. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Click the Help button.

In the following steps. For example. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or plan view in the view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the tutorials. 3 In the Project Browser. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). click Training Files.rvt. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. click 3DViews ➤ 3D. the view zooms out from the structural model. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. In the drawing area. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.Use zoom commands to adjust the view There are several ways to access zoom options. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15 . Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural model in the window.

this is referred to as a crossing selection. 8 Click in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button.6 On the View toolbar. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 16 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. When you release the mouse button. the view zooms in on the selected area. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. To modify or add snap increments. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools.

Move. click Settings menu ➤ Options. select the second item in the list. and then using the Zoom tool again. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17 . press ESC. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Undo commands 17 On the Standard toolbar. . 18 On the Undo menu. As you move the mouse. and click the SteeringWheels tab. 15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. on the View toolbar. For more information about SteeringWheels. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 13 Click and hold the mouse button.11 To display SteeringWheels. 16 To exit the wheel. moving the wheel to the desired location. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. In this example. 12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. and click Help. To define settings for SteeringWheels. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. All changes you make to a project are tracked. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.

On the Design Bar. such as the Lines command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 22 Close the file without saving your changes.Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. or press CTRL+Z. click the Undo command. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. 18 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . 21 To end the command. on the Standard toolbar. and click again to end it. Some commands. Press ESC twice. click Lines. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 20 Click in the drawing area to start the line. click Modify. End a command 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure. Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. Structural Modelling In this lesson. When you finish these tutorials. you will create and name a new steel project. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. Finally. and a concrete slab to the model. columns. you create a 5-story steel structure. you will have a basic understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools.Express Workshops 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit Structure 2009 functionality. You start by linking a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a background template for grid and column locations. beam systems. You will also learn some of the practices that can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project. Creating a New Project In this first exercise. 19 . beams. you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model. You then add structural walls.

3 In the Choose Template dialog. Save the new project 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click to create Level 3. 2 Click the value (10' 0") for the Level 2 elevation. 7 Proceed to the next exercise.1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.rvt. 6 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 2 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. click Browse. On the Options Bar. and for Offset. enter 12' 0". when a dashed line displays. Add levels 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevations). click (Pick Lines). Adding New Levels In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 3 Create additional levels as follows: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you create additional levels for your structure. and press ENTER. select Structural Analysis-Default . 20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click the Level 2 reference line. Adding New Levels on page 20. click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog.rte. ■ ■ In the drawing area. open the Imperial Templates folder. enter 12' 0". click Level. and double-click North.

7 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Press ESC.4 Repeat the previous step to create 2 new levels (Level 4. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a background for creating your structure. and Level 5). 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. each with the offset value set to 12' 0". Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21 .

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. do the following: ■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. For Positioning. (Zoom In). and click in the drawing area to display the architectural file.dwg. and select Imperial\i_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan. and draw a zoom box around the West elevation 22 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click symbol as shown. Notice that Level 2 is bold. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. Import/Link an architectural file 1 In the Project Browser. Click Open. Select Current view only.rvt. i_RST_EW_Modelling. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. select Auto . 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Reposition elevation symbols 4 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can ignore the Revit Warning. For Colors. 3 In the Import/Link dialog. select Black and White.Center to Center.

select a single column. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 23 . 9 In the drawing area. click Query. and on the Options Bar. and in the Import Instance Query dialog.5 Click the elevation symbol. and click to place the symbol. click Hide in View. 6 Use the same method to relocate the remaining elevation symbols. Hide elements in the imported drawing 7 On the View toolbar. drag it beyond the dimensions. . click drawing. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 8 Select the imported drawing.

Notice that it is labeled 2. click Grid. 24 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 10 On the Toolbar. Place horizontal grids 1 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). Adding Column Grids on page 24. 5 Select the next horizontal grid line above grid line 1. click . and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble. you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal grids. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. click 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Select the first horizontal grid line.Notice that all columns disappear. Notice that the grid line is highlighted.rvt. (Undo). Adding Column Grids In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.

12 Click the value within the grid bubble. Adding Column Grids | 25 . Notice that the grid line is highlighted. 11 Select the first vertical grid line. Make sure that all the grid bubbles are displayed on the right side of the drawing.6 Select the remaining horizontal grid lines using the zoom controls as needed. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter A. labels display in numerical sequence. Place vertical grids 8 Enter ZF. click . As you select subsequent grid lines. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Click the check box near the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off. and a value of 7 appears within the grid bubble. NOTE When you select a grid line. the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid. The last horizontal grid line is labeled 6. click Modify. click Grid.

Change drawing visibility 16 Enter ZF. select i_EW_RST_Arch_floor_plan.13 Select the next grid line to the right of grid A. Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical. and then OK. Under Halftone. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing additional structural elements. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. The last grid line is labeled G. 17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 19 Enter ZF. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click the Imported Categories tab. 14 Select the remaining vertical grid lines. Click Apply.dwg file.

Setup views 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Structural Walls | 27 . 21 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt. you add structural walls around the elevator shafts located in the center of the structure. For the remainder of this tutorial. Adding Structural Walls In this exercise. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. Adding Structural Walls on page 27. this view is referred to as the plan view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.

4 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally. and for Loc Line. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and place the first structural wall as shown. click the sketch line that represents the exterior face of the top elevator shaft. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in he 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Structural Wall. 10 Using the drawing as a guide. this view is referred to as the 3D view. For the remainder of this tutorial.2 On the View toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 Click the north exterior face of the elevator shaft to place the second structural wall. click (3D). . The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select Finish Face: Exterior. click . 8 In the Type Selector. 6 On the View toolbar. select Basic Wall : Generic . Place structural walls around the top elevator shaft 5 Click inside the plan view. and enter ZF.8" Masonry. click center of the drawing.

15 On the View Control Bar. View the structural walls in 3D 14 Click inside the 3D view and enter ZF. 13 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. place the remaining structural walls around the top elevator shaft. Adding Structural Walls | 29 . and click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading w/Edges.12 Using the same method. click Modify.

Complete the elevator shafts on the west side of the structure 16 Using the same method and wall type used to place the first elevator shaft walls. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 18 Draw a selection box around all 3 elevator shafts. and using the architectural drawing as a guide. place structural walls for the middle and bottom elevator shafts on the west side of the structure. Mirror the west elevator shafts 17 Click inside the plan view.

Adding Structural Walls | 31 . click 20 Click grid D. The elevator shafts from the west side of the structure are now mirrored on the east side. (Mirror).19 On the Toolbar.

Notice the completed elevator shafts are displayed in the 3D view. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level 2. you add columns at specific grid intersections. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Adding Structural Columns on page 32. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise.21 On the Design Bar. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.

i_RST_EW_Modelling. . select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. click structure.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Place columns at specific grid intersections 1 Click inside the plan view. 4 In the Type Selector. place a column at the following grid locations: ■ ■ B6 A5. 6 Using the same method. B5 Adding Structural Columns | 33 . Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is perpendicular with grid line 6 as shown.rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. 5 Click grid location A6 to place the first column. click Structural Column. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

12 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 11 On the Options Bar. Place remaining columns using the grid intersection tool 8 Click inside the plan view. click Structural Column. Columns are placed at each grid intersection. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter ZF. click Modify. 14 Click inside the 3D view.7 On the Design Bar. click Finish. 13 On the Toolbar. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. and enter ZF. click (Grid Intersection). 10 In the Type Selector.

click Beam. Adding Structural Beams | 35 . 5 On the Options Bar. . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click structure. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beams on page 35. 4 In the Type Selector. click Chain. You also set the offset value of the steel beams to allow for the concrete slab that will be added in a later exercise. you add structural beams to level 2 to form the steel framework of the structure. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Structural Beams In this exercise. Add beams using the chain tool 1 Click inside the plan view. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26.15 Click File menu ➤ Save.

8 Using the same method. press CTRL. and A6. that is.6 Move the cursor over the column at grid location A6 until a triangle is displayed. 10 Click the column at grid location A6. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and select the beam between A6 and A5. Create sloped beams 9 Select the beam between grid locations A6 and B6. 7 Click the midpoint of the column at grid location B6 to specify the beam endpoint. and press ENTER. The triangle indicates the midpoint of the column. place additional beams in the upper-left bay of the structure. enter 5' 0". and then click to enter the beam startpoint. A5. click the midpoints of the columns at grid locations B5.

and enter ZF. 16 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Add remaining beams using the grid intersection tool 12 Click inside the plan view. Adding Structural Beams | 37 .Notice the 3D view displays the sloped beams based on the new offset height. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. click . This project does not require sloped beams. NOTE The method used to create sloped beams is shown for demonstration purposes only. click . 11 On the Toolbar. click Beam. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click Finish. Delete beams outside the drawing floor extents Six beams that were placed at grid locations outside of the floor extents of the architectural drawing need to be deleted. and enter ZF. click through A5. 18 Click inside the 3D view. Beams are placed within the grid.17 On the Options Bar. 20 Click inside the plan view. click Modify. 21 On the View toolbar. . and draw a zoom box around the beams at grid locations A2 22 Select each beam. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 19 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. Notice the beams are deleted in the 3D view.

and draw a zoom box around the southeast side of the structure. Adding Structural Beams | 39 .23 Using the same method. 27 In the Type Selector. 28 Using the architectural drawing as a guide. delete the beams on grid locations G2 through G5. click the intersection of the beam on grid line 2 and the centerline of the wall to establish the beam startpoint. click . 29 Click the beam on grid line 3 to establish the beam endpoint. between grid lines G2 and G5. 24 Click inside the plan view. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Add new beams within the drawing floor extents The new beams are placed within the floor extents of the architectural drawing. click Beam. 25 On the View toolbar. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

30 Using the same method. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . place 2 additional beams between grid lines 3 and 5.

31 Select the 3 new beams. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. and draw a zoom box around the northeast stair shaft. 35 Select the beam between grid lines G5 and G6. and on the Toolbar. 32 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection. click . click . 34 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beams | 41 . Delete beams inside the northeast and southwest stair shafts 33 Click inside the plan view. and press DELETE.

42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and press DELETE. 37 Select the beam between grid lines A1 and A2. and draw a zoom box around the southwest stair shaft.36 On the View toolbar. and enter ZF. click . 38 Click inside the 3D view.

click center of the structure. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in the 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the elevator shaft wall. 43 Click the existing beam on grid line 2. . This is the endpoint for the first beam. 39 Click inside the plan view. Adding Structural Beams | 43 . 44 Click the existing beam on grid line 3. 40 On the View toolbar.Add 3 beams above the elevator shaft walls These beams will support a beam system that is added in the next exercise. click Beam. 42 In the Type Selector. This is the startpoint for the first beam.

click Modify. This is the endpoint for the second beam. This is the endpoint for the third beam. 46 On the Design Bar. click . 48 Click the beam on grid line D . Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the outside wall of the elevator shaft. and on the Toolbar. Mirror the elevator shaft beams 49 Select the 3 new beams. 47 Click the second beam to establish the startpoint for the third beam.45 Click the existing beam on grid line 4. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

51 Click inside the 3D view. 52 Draw a selection box around the entire model. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. Adding Structural Beams | 45 . Set the beam offset value The offset value for all beams is lowered to accommodate the slab that will be added in a future exercise.50 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection.

Only the structural framing elements (girders and joists) are highlighted. under Constraints. select Structural Framing (Joist). Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click Apply.53 On the Options Bar. do the following: Click Check None. enter -0' 5". Under Category. and then click OK. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 On the Options Bar. select Structural Framing (Girder). For z-Direction Offset Value. do the following: For z-Direction Justification. select Other. Under Category. click ■ ■ ■ . Notice the beams have been lowered in the 3D view. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 54 In the Filter dialog.

Adding Structural Beam Systems In this exercise. For Maximum Spacing. 5 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the bays on the northeast side 6 Select the beam between grid locations A5 and A6 to set the beam system direction. select 3D. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Adding Structural Beam Systems on page 47. Under Pattern. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click of the structure. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. select Maximum Spacing.rvt. click Beam System. Adding Structural Beam Systems | 47 . For Beam Type. i_RST_EW_Modelling. enter 9' 0". Click OK. and enter ZF. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. you add multiple structural beam systems to the steel frame on Level 2. for Layout Rule. 3 On the Options Bar.57 Click File menu ➤ Save. . Automatically create multiple beam systems 1 Click inside the plan view.

7 Click to place the beam system. 10 Click inside the 3D view. 8 Using the same settings and method.The beam system location displays with a blue dashed line. Notice the beam system displays in the 3D view. and enter ZF. do not place a beam system in the bays for the stairs in the northwest and southeast corners of the structure. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the structure. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . NOTE Some beam systems might include 2 beams based on the size of the bay. Also.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save. you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing. Adding a Structural Slab In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. You are now in sketch mode. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter ZF. Adding a Structural Slab | 49 . 3 On the Design Bar. and use the mirror tool to complete the sketch. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Slab. You create the sketch lines for the left side of the slab. Trace the architectural drawing floor plan 1 Click inside the plan view. Adding a Structural Slab on page 49. click Lines.rvt.

zoom in and out as needed. and DELETE to remove unwanted lines and to clean up line intersections.4 On the View toolbar. . 7 Continue sketching lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported drawing. use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the northwest corner of the 5 Click the edge of the floor outline to start the slab sketch. click structure. 6 Place the first sketch line along the exterior edge of the architectural drawing. When sketching the slab. If necessary. and make sure there are no duplicate sketch lines. 8 Continue sketching the slab until you reach grid line D. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Adding a Structural Slab | 51 . 10 Draw a selection box around the left half of the view to select all sketch lines. click . 11 On the Toolbar. 12 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection.Use the mirror tool to copy the slab sketch 9 Enter ZF.

click line D. Complete the slab sketch 15 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 14 Enter ZF. . and draw a zoom box around the top of the slab sketch at grid 17 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch.

click Lines. and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the Adding a Structural Slab | 53 . . 19 On the Design Bar. click structure.18 On the View toolbar. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 On the View toolbar. . click grid line D. 21 Enter ZF. and draw a zoom box around the bottom of the slab sketch at 20 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. 24 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. click Lines.

and draw a zoom box around the northeast corner of the 30 Enter ZF. click Finish Sketch. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 29 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown.25 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 31 On the Design Bar. click structure. 27 On the View toolbar. . 26 Enter ZF. 28 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

click No when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to attach to its bottom. i_RST_EW_Modelling.In the Revit dialog. beams. beam systems.rvt. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels In this exercise. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 55 . Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. and the slab from Level 2 to the remaining levels of the structure. you copy columns. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 55. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save.

do the following: For Top Constraint. 4 In the Filter dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). click ■ ■ 6 In the Element Properties dialog. . 3 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. do the following: Click Check None. select Walls.Extend the elevator shaft walls up to Level 5 1 Click inside the plan view. Under Category. and enter ZF. 2 Draw a selection box around the entire view. Click OK. select Up to level: Level 5. and then click OK. Click Apply. Notice the elevator shaft walls are displayed in the 3D view. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Extend columns up to Level 3 7 Click inside the plan view. select Level 5. and draw a selection box around the entire view. do the following: For Top Level. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 57 . click ■ ■ ■ 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. Click Apply. do the following: Click Check None. 14 In the Select Levels dialog. Under Category. click ■ ■ ■ . click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Click OK. under Constraints. select Structural Columns. select Level 3. 8 On the Options Bar. For Top Offset. Notice the columns are extended to Level 3 in the 3D view. . 13 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Copy columns up to Level 5 12 With the columns still selected. Notice the columns are extended to Level 5 in the 3D view. enter 4' 0". 10 On the Options Bar. and then click OK.

20 In the Filter dialog. do the following: For Base Offset. under Constraints. Under Category. and Structural Framing (Joist). 24 Enter ZF 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . select Floors. and draw a selection box around the entire structure. Click Apply. 22 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ . Structural Beam Systems. on the Options Bar. enter 4' 0". select Level 3 and Level 5. 17 On the Design Bar. while pressing CTRL. For Top Offset. and then click OK. Copy remaining structural elements up to Level 5 18 Click inside the 3D view. Click OK.Change the top and bottom offset values 15 With the columns still selected. click Modify. and then click OK. do the following: Click Check None. Structural Framing (Girder). ■ 21 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. enter 0' 0'. 23 In the Select Levels dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ .

i_RST_EW_Modelling. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Foundations on page 59. and then you add a slab foundation under the elevator shafts. click Modify. Adding Foundations In this exercise. 2 Enter ZF. Place isolated foundations under each column 1 In the Project Browser.25 On the Design Bar. Adding Foundations | 59 . you add an isolated foundation under each structural column. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1.rvt. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Structural Plans.

click Finish. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Toolbar. click . 5 On the Options Bar. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts. All the structural columns are highlighted. click Modify. Notice the footings located between the elevator shaft walls. click (Structural Column). 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Delete 2 footings near the elevator shaft 9 On the View toolbar. select Footing-Rectangular : 72" x 48" x 18". The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations. 4 In the Type Selector.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Draw a selection box around the entire structure.

13 In the Element Properties dialog. The foundation is now displayed in 3-dimensions.10 Select both footings. click Finish Sketch. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Floor Properties. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. Place a slab foundation under the elevator shafts 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. for Type. click Foundation ➤ Slab. select 12" Foundation Slab. click 19 Enter ZF. 16 Click above the upper-left corner of the elevator shaft walls and sketch the slab so it surrounds the walls and columns as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. Adding Foundations | 61 . (3D). You are now in sketch mode. click (Rectangle).

Next.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Finally. you place it in an existing project sheet. incorporating its line styles within the Revit Structure workflow. Structural Detailing In this lesson. you learn to import and modify an AutoCAD DWG file. and modify its line properties. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . you create and annotate model-based details in a section view. You begin by importing an AutoCAD drawing as a reference section. You then import detail views from a Revit detail library project and place them in a new sheet. Structural Detailing on page 62. You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial.

rvt. click Training Files.dwg. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural AutoCAD drawing (DWG format) to use as a detail reference in a sheet. and open \Imperial\i_RST_EW_Working_with_AutoCAD. Click OK. Map line weights to DWG/DXF color numbers 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Setting ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. ■ Click Save As. but do not open it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.txt in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory. Select a scale of 1/4”= 1'-0". click Training Files. do the following: ■ Select the Link option. Import the DWG file 6 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 3 Save the Import Line Weight file as line. 8 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Free_Standing_Wall_Section. 5 In the New Drafting View dialog. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 63 .Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 7 to a line weight of 9. 2 In the Import Line Weights dialog. Create a new drafting view 4 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. do the following: ■ ■ Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 4 to a line weight of 5. 7 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Name the view Typical Wall Section. You begin by setting Revit Structure to associate line weights to the DWG/DXF color numbers of the imported AutoCAD file.

select Black and White. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. Notice the imported detail is linked into the Typical Wall Section drafting view with the mapped line weights.Center to Center. select Auto .■ ■ For Colors. 11 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. For Positioning. ■ Click Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View on page 65. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 9 Enter ZF (Zoom to fit). and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Detailing.

i_RST_EW_Detailing. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice that Level 1 is bold. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. you create a section that references an existing detail view. 2 On the View toolbar.rvt. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. select Drafting View: Typical Wall Selection. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 1. Select the Reference other view option. click . and draw a zoom box around grid locations A2 and A3. 4 On the Options Bar. click Section. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View | 65 . From the adjacent drop-down list of views. Create the section reference 1 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale.Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View In this exercise.

move the cursor down. Placing a Detail in a Sheet on page 66. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Add the detail view to a sheet 1 Close all views except for Level 1. and click inside the north wall to place the section.Unnamed. 3 Enter WT (Tile Windows). 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. and double-click S.1. expand select Sheets (all). 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Placing a Detail in a Sheet In this exercise. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . you place the imported detail view on an existing sheet. i_RST_EW_Detailing.5 Click outside the wall between grid lines 2 and 3. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.

.Unnamed and the Level 1 structural plan views are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 67 .Sheet S-1 . click Level 1 on the sheet. 4 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and drag Typical Wall Section onto the sheet view. and draw a zoom box around the empty space to the right of 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Release the mouse button.

7 Move the cursor to align the detail outline in the empty space of the sheet.Notice the detail drawing outline. 8 Click to place the detail. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

and draw a zoom box around the title block in the lower-right 10 Double-click the sheet number. and click ENTER. . click corner of the sheet.0. notice the section callout has updated according to the detail and the sheet number. Change the sheet number in the title block 9 On the View toolbar. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 69 .In the structural plan view of Level 1. change it to S-1.

In the structural plan view of Level 1. notice the section callout has updated according to the new sheet number. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details In this exercise.rvt. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you change the line properties of the imported AutoCAD drawing to display differently in Revit Structure. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details on page 70.

click . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details | 71 . expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and double-click Typical Wall Section. 2 Click on the detail drawing. 4 Click one of the lines representing the exterior surface of the wall cross-section.Determine the drawing layer of the line 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar.

12 Click OK. for Weight. Change the weight of the line 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select 4. notice the Layer value CONT5. 10 Click the Override button in the Lines column of the CONT5 row. 14 Click OK. 8 Click the Imported Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 11 In the Line Graphics dialog.5 In the Import Instance Query dialog. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 9 Click the CONT5 row. 6 Click OK. 13 Click Apply.

Notice that all lines associated with the CONT5 layer are now set to a line weight of 4.TYPICAL CONCRETE WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library In this exercise. you import multiple detail views and place them on a new project sheet.rvt.rvt. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Typ_slab_detail_library. Select the following views to insert: ■ ■ ■ Drafting View 001 . 3 In the Insert Views dialog.TYPICAL CONCRETE FOOTING WITHOUT PIER OR PILASTER DETAIL Drafting View 007 . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library | 73 . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library on page 73.TYPICAL SLOPE BETWEEN FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 003 . select Show all views and sheets. click Training Files.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTINGS AT UTILITY OPENING DETAIL Drafting View 004 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing. do the following: ■ ■ For Views. Import detail views from a Revit Structure detail library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.TYPICAL PLAN OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCING OF CONCRETE WALLS DETAIL Drafting View 009 . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 002 . 2 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog.

click OK. 12 Use the same method to place the remaining views that were imported earlier in this exercise. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Notice the imported details are listed In the Project Browser under Views (All) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) Create a new sheet 5 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and drag 001 . 7 Click OK. 9 Release the mouse button. Add the detail views to a sheet 8 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 10 Move the cursor to position the detail outline on the sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 11 Click to place the detail.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL onto the sheet view.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 75 . and draw a zoom box around grid locations C1 and D1.T. double-click Level 3 .O. Prepare a section view 1 In the Project Browser.S. 2 On the View toolbar. i_RST_EW_Detailing. click .rvt.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. and close all other views. you create a section view and crop it so that it can be displayed side by side with a related structural plan. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section on page 75.. 14 Proceed to the next exercise.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 3/4" = 1'-0". 5 Click outside the wall, halfway between grid lines C and D, move the cursor to the right, and click inside the west wall to place the section.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.

76 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

7 In the section view:

Locate the double-arrow control at the top of the crop area, and drag it down to just above the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 77

Click and drag the double-arrow control handle at the bottom of the crop area to just below the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Click the double-arrow control handle to the left of the crop area, and drag it to the right to reduce white space.

78 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

8 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■

Click Click

(Hide Crop Region). (Detail Level: Fine).

9 On the View toolbar, click wall.

, and draw a zoom box around the beam connection, slab, and

10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - T.O.S., and close all other views. 11 Enter WT. Level 3 - T.O.S. and Section 1 are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Cantilever to a Slab on page 79.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
In this exercise, you add a cantilever to the existing slab using section and plan views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Select a slab and enter sketch mode 1 In the section view to the right, select the slab.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 79

Notice the slab is highlighted in the plan view to the left.

2 On the Options Bar, click 4 Click Open View.

.

3 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 3 - T.O.S. Notice the plan view has entered sketch mode. Add the cantilever 5 In the plan view, while pressing CTRL, select the vertical and arc segments of the slab.

80 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

6 On the Option Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -9", for Steel, enter -2". 7 Press ENTER to apply the setting. 8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Notice that the cantilever now extends from the slab. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise, Coping Beam Connections on page 82.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 81

Coping Beam Connections
In this exercise, you will cope a beam where it joins a perpendicular beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Extend the beam flush to the connection 1 In the section view, select the beam as shown.

2 Unpin the selected beam by clicking on the pin.

3 Drag the control at the left of the selected beam to the left so the end of the beam is flush to the center of the perpendicular beam, as shown.

82 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 On the Toolbar, click

(Coping).

5 Select the newly extended beam, as shown.

6 Select the perpendicular beam, as shown.

Coping Beam Connections | 83

Notice the beam is coped to the shape of the beam it joins.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components on page 84.

Adding Detail Components
In this exercise, you will add a shear connector, a structural angle, an expansion bolt, and an L-angle welded connection to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.

84 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

Add a shear connector 1 Close the Level 2 plan view, and maximize the Section 1 view. 2 On the View toolbar, click and slab. , and draw a zoom box around the top of the beam connection

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector, select Shear Connectors-Side : 3/4”. 5 Move the cursor to the top center of the beam as shown.

6 Click to place the shear connector.

Adding Detail Components | 85

Add a structural angle 7 In the Type Selector, select AISC Angle Shapes-Section : L8x6x7/16. 8 Move the cursor to the empty space below and to the right of the beam as shown.

9 Press the SPACEBAR once to rotate the angle 90° counterclockwise. 10 Click to place the angle. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the angle.

86 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

13 Click the vertical flip control.

Adding Detail Components | 87

14 On the Toolbar, click

(Align).

15 Click the bottom segment of the beam, as shown.

88 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

16 Click the angle, and then click the lock for the alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 89

17 Click the interior segment of the exterior wall, as shown.

90 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

18 Click the angle, and then click the lock for alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 91

Add an expansion bolt 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 Align the bolt halfway along the left side of the angle. as shown. select Expansion Bolts-Side : 3/4”. 92 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Detail Component. 21 Move the cursor into the drawing area near the angle. 20 In the Type Selector. 22 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the bolt 180° counterclockwise.

as shown. click (Move). 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Detail Components | 93 . 27 Click the center of the interior segment of the bolt head. 26 On the Toolbar. click Modify.24 Click to place the bolt.

28 Move the cursor to align with the outer segment of the angle. 94 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . as shown.

Adding Detail Components | 95 .29 Click to move the bolt flush with the angle.

click Detail Component. 32 Move the cursor into the drawing area to the right of the beam connection. select L-Angle-Welded Connection-Elevation : L4x4x5/16. 31 In the Type Selector.Add an L-angle connection 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 96 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

click Modify. as shown. change the value for L to 10” 40 On the Toolbar. click (Align). 41 Click the right segment of the perpendicular beam.33 Click to place the L-angle. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Detail Components | 97 . and then click the lock for the alignment. 34 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. . 35 Select the L-angle. 42 Click the left segment of the L-angle. 36 On the Options Bar. click 38 Click OK. as shown. 39 Click on the L-angle and drag it to the middle of the beam.

Adding Final Annotation and Detailing on page 98. 98 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . you will add break lines and annotation to the section view. Add break lines 1 Enter ZF.rvt. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.43 Click File menu ➤ Save 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing In this final exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing.

8 Click to place the break line. select Break Line. below the structural angle and expansion bolt. 7 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the break line 180° counterclockwise. 6 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall. to the right of the coping detail. as shown. as shown. 5 Click to place the break line.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 99 . click Detail Component 3 In the Type Selector. 4 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall above the slab. as shown. Notice the white space beneath the break line and the continuation of the wall beyond it. The crop area for the section view will be adjusted later. 9 Move the cursor onto the slab.

10 Press the SPACEBAR 3 times to rotate the break line 270° counterclockwise. 13 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ (Show Crop Region). 100 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click to place the break line. 14 Select the crop region and adjust it as follows: Drag the bottom double-arrow control upward to obscure the wall below the break line. Drag the right double-arrow control to the left to obscure the slab and beam to the right of the break line. click Modify.

Move the cursor up and to the right. click Add annotation (Hide Crop Region). click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). Move the cursor to the right. 17 On the Options Bar.15 On the View Control Bar. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 101 . Click to finish the first leader segment. 18 Click in the drawing area. click Text. Click to finish the second leader segment. ■ Type STRUCTURAL SLAB (SEE PLAN). as shown. away from the text box. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and do the following: Click on the top segment of the slab.

21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 102 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Click to finish the second leader segment. Type STL BEAM (SEE PLAN).19 Click the right drag handle and move it to the left to resize the text box. Move the cursor to the right. as shown. 20 Click on the bottom segment of the beam and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and to the right. Click to finish the first leader segment. click (Add Left Leader). 22 Click on the leader. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

as shown. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 103 . 25 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box to the left to resize the box.24 Drag the dot control of the new leader down so that it meets the bottom segment of the beam.

as shown. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Right). click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). ANCHORED TO WALL USING 2-3/4” DIA. Click to finish the leader segment. click Text. 28 Click in the drawing area. click 32 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. Click to finish the first leader segment. click Text. EXPANSION ANCHORS.C.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and do the following: Click on the bottom segment of the structural angle. SECTIONS FOR REINF. (One Segment). away from the text box. Move the cursor to the right. away from the text box. 27 On the Options Bar. Type L8X6X3/16 (LLH) x ‘1-0” LONG CLIPS 2 4’-0” O. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and do the following: Click on the exterior segment of the wall. Move the cursor down and to the right. Type CMU WALL (SEE FOUND. 33 Click in the drawing area. 29 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box and move it to the left to resize the box. 104 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Click to finish the second leader segment. INFO). Move the cursor to the left.

as shown.34 Drag the dot control at the left of the text box and move it to the right to resize the box. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 105 .

106 .

6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. In the second lesson. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click Browse. you modify the system environment. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 4 In the Options dialog.rte. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2009 working environment. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 9 In the New Project dialog. In the first lesson. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. click the Graphics tab. they are not saved to project or template files. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. selection default options. select Invert background color. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click Training Files. These settings control the graphics.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. 7 In the New Project dialog. and set it as your default template. notification preferences. Notice that the drawing area is black. and your username when using worksets. you create an office template. journal cleanup options. click OK. 107 . you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. Finally. Set graphics settings 1 Open Revit Structure. and click OK. which is independent of the project settings. 5 Under Colors. under Template file.

click Structural Wall. 19 On the Design Bar. click the value for Selection Color. When an error occurs. 24 When prompted to save. 15 Under Notifications. select One hour. Setting Options 25 Click File menu ➤ Open. 20 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None.rvt. 12 Under Colors. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Save Reminder interval. select None. and click OK. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. For Tooltip Assistance. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 108 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Modify. 13 In the Color dialog. select One hour.10 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Modify. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 14 Click the General tab. click No. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. 16 Click OK. 11 In the Options dialog. select yellow. and open Imperial\i_RST_Settings. the elements causing the error display using this color. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. and select the wall. click Training Files. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click the Graphics tab. For Save to Central Reminder Interval.

you specify your default file locations. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Specifying File Locations on page 109. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Under Windows Username. under Default path for family template files. ■ ■ 30 Click OK. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). clear Invert background color. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. you can start a new project with that template. These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. 3 Under Default template file. click Browse. 4 Click Cancel. 7 In the Options dialog. Specifying File Locations | 109 . Your login name displays by default. select Red. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. click Browse. 5 Under Default path for user files. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session. and click Browse to select a template. TIP To view a template. Under Journal File Cleanup. select the folder to save your files to by default.27 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 29 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. and the family template files. the family libraries. For Selection Color. as well as the material and rendering libraries. click the File Locations tab. 31 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. These files are used primarily in the software support process. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure. 28 In the Options dialog. click Browse. If prompted. 2 In the Options dialog. and click Open. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. do not save the changes.

centralized. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. such as in a large. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. saving. (Add Library Path) that displays 110 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . However. 10 Under Libraries. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. and change the name to My Library. and you can create new libraries. or loading a Revit Structure file. 12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. NOTE When you are opening. click (Add Value). Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane. In the following illustration. click Place. and click on the right-side of the field. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 8 Click Cancel. and notice the list of library names.This path is set automatically during the installation process. You can modify the existing library names and path. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path.

Save. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Specifying File Locations | 111 . The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. 21 Under Libraries. and click OK. and Import dialogs. templates. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog. 14 Under Library Name. 22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. select My Library. 20 Click the File Locations tab. click My Library. 16 Click File menu ➤ Open. 18 Click Cancel. If you work in a large office. click the My Library icon. Load. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and select it as the library path. 15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. or families.

you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 20 Under Settings. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Spelling tab. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. scroll down the list of building industry terms. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 17 Click OK. Click File menu ➤ Exit. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. enter sheetmtl-Cu.23 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 In the Options dialog. 4 Under Personal dictionary. 112 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 On the Standard toolbar. Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 Click in the drawing area. 5 In the text editor. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click template. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 2 In the Options dialog. 22 In the text editor. click OK. click Restore Defaults. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Delete sheetmtl-CU. do not save the changes. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click OK. Specifying Spelling Options on page 112. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 11 In the Options dialog. 9 In the text editor. 3 Under Settings. click Text. click Edit. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. If prompted. to open a new Revit Structure project using the default 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Options dialog. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click the Spelling tab. click Edit. click Edit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit.

and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. In this exercise. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area. under Template file. click Training Files.25 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Snap Settings | 113 . Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. For example. click OK. As you zoom in and out within a view. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Browse. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Modifying Snap Settings on page 113. click Structural Wall. you modify snap increments. click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and enter 1. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action. 6 Under Dimension Snaps. 2 In the New Project dialog. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 7 Under Object Snaps. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.rte.. you modify snap settings. You can turn snap settings on and off. 4 In the New Project dialog. snapping reverts to the system default settings. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. work with snapping turned off.

If you do not have a wheel button. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Use snapping shortcut keys 15 On the Design Bar. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. click Modify. This is the increment that you added previously. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. 14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. While sketching. and move the cursor to the right. 11 While sketching a generic straight wall. Sketch without snapping 12 While sketching the wall. This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. and click Wall.10 Click in the center of the drawing area. Notice that snapping is once again active. If it does not. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'. Do not set the wall end point. The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries. zoom out until it does so. and move the cursor to the right. Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments. 13 Click to set the wall endpoint.

the midpoint. 23 Click OK. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. When you apply a material to a component.Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and specify the wall endpoint. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials.rvt. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. 22 Under Dimension Snaps. it will snap to the endpoints. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and do not save the file. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. 17 Enter SM. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. and the wall edges. save the project file with a unique name. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Modifying Project Settings | 115 . 2 Scroll down. and delete the value 1". Modifying Project Settings on page 115. If you move the cursor along the wall. 25 Proceed to the next lesson. 19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise.Precast Concrete for Name. annotations. click Training Files. fill patterns. and use it to complete the exercises. 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and open Imperial\i_RST_Proj_Settings. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. When a model component is loaded into a project. 18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 20 Move the cursor downward. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. and select Concrete . You create and modify materials. lines. and object styles. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. 3 Click (Duplicate). Using these options. Finally. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. This list includes all materials available for use on model components. In the left pane of the Open dialog.. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views.

click Edit/New. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click This is the material you created previously. 11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2.Precast. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it. . and click OK. click Edit. 10 In the Value field for Structure. click Modify. 14 Click OK 3 times. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 12 On the right side of the Material field. 4 In the Duplicate Material dialog. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete. 15 Select the left foundation wall. 16 Press CTRL. Wall. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. and double-click T. Apply the new material 5 In the Project Browser.O.This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. and click OK. select Concrete-Precast for Name. and click . You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom. In the steps that follow. 9 Enter Foundation . you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type. 13 In the Materials dialog. 6 Select the lower exterior wall.Custom for the new wall name. 8 Click Duplicate. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. and select the remaining exterior walls. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. Fnd. enter Concrete .

When it is finished. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. zoom into the model. do the following: ■ ■ For Quality Setting. and select Rendering. Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view. select Best. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. In the following exercise. 21 In the drawing area. NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail. the material that you created is displayed. Click Render. The rendering process begins. draw a pick box around the entire 3D image. you create a pattern and apply it to this material.19 On the View Toolbar. click Rendering dialog. and drag a zoom box around the area you want to render. right-click the Design Bar. click . 22 In the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Materials | 117 .

4 Scroll down the list of patterns. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. click Import. under Display.23 On the Rendering dialog. click Show Model. You can align. rotate. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 5 Click New. Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. i_Settings-in progress. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 26 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog.rvt. and double-click West. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. expand Elevations. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. choose Model. 7 Under Custom. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 3 Under Pattern Type. click Custom. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall.rvt. such as steel. 24 Close the Rendering dialog. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and move model patterns. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software.

to select a fill pattern. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. Apply the concrete surface pattern 13 On the View Control Bar. and click Open. It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast. 14 Select the wall. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 19 On the right side of the Materials field. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 119 .TIP Typically. 26 On the View Toolbar. select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale. select Model. 27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click 20 Under Surface Pattern. click OK. click . 17 In the Value field for Structure. select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. click Modify. and click OK.pat from the Common folder. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. adjust your zoom settings as needed. 10 Under Custom. 25 On the Design Bar. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. click in the Material field for Layer 2. 21 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Select Concrete_Surface. 22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern. click Edit. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. TIP If the pattern does not display. and click OK. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. under Pattern Type. 23 In the Materials dialog. click . . 12 Click OK. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK 3 times. 15 On the Options Bar.

Controlling Object Styles on page 120. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss. i_Settings-in progress. there are often multiple trusses within a project. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.28 Click File menu ➤ Save. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .rvt. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the keyboard. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. expand 3D Views. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses. and double-click 3D. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. For example. use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area.

7 Under the Walls category. double-click the Line Color field. Notice the line color is applied to the wall. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. 8 In the Color dialog. 6 Under Category. 5 In the Object Styles dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Custom Colors. click OK. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 122. click Model Graphics Style. click Show categories from all disciplines. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. expand Walls. and click OK. Controlling Object Styles | 121 . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Hidden Line. select Blue.

Under Line Pattern. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. enter Truss for Name. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss. and select Web Joist. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. now you must apply it. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog.rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Fnd.Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. i_Settings-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You have created a new line pattern. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Click OK. Wall. click New. 10 In the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify the 3D view is active. (example: plan view).O. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view. click Model Graphics Style. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. 8 On the View Control Bar. expand Structural Framing. You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage. under Floor Plans. Apply the new line pattern 7 In the Project Browser. select Truss. and click Hidden Line. double-click T. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Select Truss for Line Pattern. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight. 15 Click OK twice. and select Web Joist for Visibility.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Select Blue for Line Color. 14 In the Select Line Style dialog. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 123 . 13 Click Override for Line Style Projection. expand Structural Framing. 12 Click the Model Categories tab.

Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. Select Red for Line Color. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection. under Floor Plans. 25 In the Options Bar. double-click T. click Lines. 18 In the Line Styles dialog. and click OK. 26 Draw 3 vertical lines. Slab. click New. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Click . equally spaced as shown below. Click OK. 19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name. Enter 2' 0" for Offset.Create a new line style 16 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ Click Click . 23 In the Options Bar. and click to set the rectangle endpoint.O. under Modify Subcategories. 21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. . select Underslab Drainage. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the slab. 20 For the Underslab Drainage category. Click . 24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle. 22 In the Type Selector.

Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view.Imperial for name. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Modifying Annotations | 125 . you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click the default value for Units Format. 29 On the Model Categories tab. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 33 On the Model Categories tab. i_Settings-in progress. click Duplicate. and click OK.rvt. 30 Click OK. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 4 Enter Linear . and clear Underslab Drainage.27 On the View Toolbar. click . You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify the 3D View is active. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand Lines. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Modifying Annotations on page 125. expand Lines. 34 Click OK. 31 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. 5 Under Text. and clear Underslab Drainage. double-click Level 1. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Wall.O. click Modify. and open Imperial\Structural Framing Tag. You have created a new dimension style. 12 Click Load. click 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Tags dialog. A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag. notice that there is a Linear .rfa. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Fnd. 19 On the Design Bar. 22 On the View Toolbar. under Floor Plans. the other displays the instance value. . and click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. 15 Under Loaded Tags. 16 Click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. In the Type Selector. 18 Click a beam. Under Category. Load a new beam tag 10 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. 13 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click T. verify that Create is clear. 7 Click OK twice. click Structural Framing Tag. The remaining untagged beams are tagged. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. click Dimension. Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. Structural Framing Tag. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice the structural framing tag appears twice. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. 21 Under Leader.Imperial dimension available.

and Detail Level Options | 127 . Specifying Units of Measurement. In the first section. In this project. dimensions use these project settings. you modify the detail level assignments. under Length. Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. and click OK. and click OK. You do not select a view scale to move it. select SF for Unit suffix. click . 12 Click OK. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. under Area. select Openings. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 8 Under Walls. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. 6 Click OK. 5 In the Format dialog. Specifying Units of Measurement. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. click the default value for Format. you specify the project units of measurement .Temporary Dimensions. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.Temporary Dimensions. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. In the final section. and Detail Level Options on page 127.unless there is an override. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Temporary Dimensions. In the second section. click the default value for Format. Unless there is an override. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. dimension values display using this setting.24 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Project Units dialog. 4 In the Project Units dialog. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. 3 In the Format dialog. temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. you modify the temporary dimension settings.rvt. In this table. i_Settings-in progress. Specifying Units of Measurement. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and click OK. select Centerlines 9 Under Doors and Windows.

2 In the Project Browser. NOTE In this exercise.rvt.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Phase 1-Structure East Wing .Phase 2-Structure West Wing . Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . click Training Files. expand Sheets (all). you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. In this exercise. and double-click Completed Project.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 128. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.

20 In the Browser Organization dialog. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. notice that views are grouped based on phase. under Sheets. and click OK. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 10 In the Project Browser. On the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. and click New. expand each sheet set. 8 Select Phase. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. and click OK. expand each view type. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. In the Project Browser. and click OK. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 5 On the Views tab. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 129 . under Views. select Discipline. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views. 21 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. click the Folders tab. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. select Type/Discipline. 16 Click the Views tab.■ Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and click OK. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

such as structural or construction. 6 In the Project Browser. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. In this lesson. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. and Discipline. Other than the default template. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from. 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. dimensions styles. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Depending on your needs. and click OK. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and rendered scenes in a template. click Browse. enter a unique file name. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. Creating a Structural Template In this lesson. 5 Click OK. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. You can also save these settings in a template file. navigate to your preferred directory. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template. When you create new projects. and view names. In the lesson that follows. Type. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. expand Views ➤ Elevations. the same rules apply. you select the starting point for your structural template. select Project for Create new. 2 Under Template File. and click Open. levels. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. 4 In the New Project dialog. For example. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. and double-click Building Elevation. you create an office template. When you create a new template based on an existing template. If you want to save this file. If your work requires a variety of templates. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. Whenever you create a new project or template. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. named print settings. preloaded families. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template.rte template. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization.Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. when you create a new project. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration.

you modify the project settings for your new template. weights. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction In addition to the list above. Modifying Project Settings on page 131. there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. in the drawing area. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. navigate throughout the various views and schedules.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. Other templates. If you have additional projects open. click Browse. 8 In the Project Browser. you can select it now. In this exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. such as the structural template. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. When you create the material. select Project Template. 13 Click Open. 12 Select a default template. If you want to use a template other than the default. 11 Under Template File. close them. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. 14 Under Create New. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. For example. and click OK.

The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and move model patterns. Specify object styles 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and one for annotation symbol line styles. For more details on modifying these settings. line patterns.During this exercise. Observe the materials that are already defined. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. see the previous lesson. 3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. In the Object Styles dialog. 12 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. You can add and delete view scales. or refer to the Help documentation. 9 Click the Model Objects tab. line colors. 14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. or modify existing patterns. 2 Scroll down the Name list. specific modifications are not dictated. create new subcategories. such as beams and columns in orthographic views. one for perspective model line styles. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 115 for more information on creating new fill patterns. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. In the dialog. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. 6 Create new fill patterns as needed. Modify line weights 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. 7 Click OK when finished. You can align. and scroll through the list of categories. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. and create new subcategories as needed. Create and modify fill patterns 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 13 Modify categories. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. rotate. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. create and modify them as needed. 10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. you can set line weights. Modifying System Settings on page 107. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 11 If necessary.

23 Click OK. select it from this list. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. and click Edit. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 17 Modify existing line weights as needed. 35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. To see the details of a particular style. and specify the properties. name the style. 40 Select the Type drop-down list. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 27 Add and delete line patterns as needed. select it from this list. To see the details of a particular style. click Duplicate. angular. 19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 20 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify Dimension Styles 39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. name the style. 41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. Linear. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 38 Click OK. Modify line styles 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. or line pattern as needed. 31 If necessary. 28 Click OK. 32 Click OK. such as section lines and dimension lines. modify the line weight. and dimensions. select it. line color. 37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . 25 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. click Duplicate. tags. and radial dimensions are modified separately.The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. 21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. and specify the properties. 30 For existing line categories. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 34 Select the Type drop-down list. 18 Add and delete view scales as needed. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. Modify arrowheads 33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. Modify line patterns 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 26 To modify a line pattern. 43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 16 Click the Model Line Weights tab.

you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. and choose a decimal symbol. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. 55 Specify the Slope option. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. Modify loaded tags 46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and click OK. For example. 51 Under Length. 59 Under Doors and Windows. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. Volume. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 52 Modify the unit settings if necessary. or Fine. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. Using the arrows between the columns. When you create a new view. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. and move view scales as needed. 47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 58 Under Walls. Medium. 53 Click OK. Specify project units 50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 56 Click OK. The detail level is based on view scale. 48 To load new annotation tags. Specify detail levels 61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. click Load. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected.44 Click OK. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 62 Review the table. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 60 Click OK. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. Specify temporary dimensions 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. click Format. 54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. 49 After you have loaded the necessary tags. and Angle settings. In the Tags dialog. TIP In the drawing area. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags.

70 If necessary. 66 Delete. click the arrows between columns. 63 Click OK. click View Direction. Rename. This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. 69 Delete. 71 Click OK. right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. create new browser organization types. Modify project browser organization 64 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. To move the view scales. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. or Edit existing organization types. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . 74 In the Type Properties dialog. create new browser organization types. In certain projects. or from the roof looking down (down direction). The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 68 Click the Sheets tab. or Edit existing organization types. Rename. click Edit/New. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. 65 In the Browser Organization dialog. engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. In a typical project. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Setting View Direction 72 In the Project Browser. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). 67 If necessary. click the Views tab. and select Properties.NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. For example.

76 Click OK to exit the dialogs. Use the table below as a checklist. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. and make modifications in each area as necessary.75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. If necessary. In such a case. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. Although these settings can be saved within a template. This could be useful for things such as title blocks. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Additional project settings 77 On the Settings menu. View Templates Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. You can find additional information in Help. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. However. and framing tags. Links to associated tutorials are provided. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. For example. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work.

you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. and click OK. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. You can load any family or group into a template. modify. However. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. you could load detail components. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. Click Duplicate. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. See Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change.Settings Menu Command Structural Settings Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. If this selection is satisfactory. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 To modify. select it. and click OK. or load a new beam type. If necessary. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. and beams. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. In addition. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. Although the options are endless. For example. you may want to delete. Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. For example. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. select Load. Modify beam type Create new beam type Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 137 . Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. and column symbols. you do both. In the steps that follow. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. In the Element Properties dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. Obviously. enter a name. titleblocks. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. brace symbols. Make modifications. Although this is possible. click Beam. create. or add to this selection. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 137. there are some important thoughts to consider. do so before starting this exercise. select Edit/New. notice the list of beams is already loaded. Depending on the intended use of this template. If you have not completed the previous exercise. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. select Edit/New. and click OK. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. and click Open. Modify type properties. 78 Proceed to the next exercise. click on the Options Bar. you can move onto the next component type. if you loaded every beam type you could find.

Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. This titleblock is currently part of the template. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 12 Click OK. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. 11 To load a titleblock. Notice that each family category is listed. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. To do so. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. create. and click Delete. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps.4 Click OK. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. load. expand Families. click Preview. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. Press ESC twice to return to the template. click Load. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. 14 Proceed to the next exercise.) 9 Expand the titleblock. and select the titleblock type. right-click the component.

and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. you save time and increase consistency. right-click. select the view. you will first modify view templates. you create the views required for your template. rename or duplicate the view template.Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. and double-click Level 1. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. At any time. 2 For Name. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. Detail Level. TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser. In addition. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. and select Apply View Template. View Range. In this exercise. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views. In this exercise. you created new projects using different templates. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. Modifying Views and View Templates | 139 . These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 4 If necessary. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. you can apply a view template to any view. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. Discipline. 6 Click OK. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. select Structural Framing Plan. and make modifications. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. 3 Specify each value as needed. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans.

23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. select Make Plan View. 15 If you modified any other view templates. click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. duplicate. 27 In the Project Browser. and apply the appropriate template. this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. under Elevations. 17 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Apply.Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 12 In the Project Browser. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. under Structural Plans. the view is not linked to the template in any way. right-click {3D}. After the template is applied. 21 In the Options Bar. under 3D Views. 24 Create additional levels as needed. if desired. To do so. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view. This option means that every time a new plan view is created. review the existing floor plans. review the Structural plans and elevations. Create 3D views 25 To add 3D views to the template. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. 19 In the Project Browser. on the View toolbar. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. If necessary. open the view from the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 To add additional levels to the template. click Apply. or delete this view. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. You can rename this view. expand 3D Views. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Floor Plans. Rename. click 26 In the Project Browser. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. under Structural Plans. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. or delete them as needed. 28 Rename the 3D View. You can also duplicate or delete the view. duplicate. Create and modify views 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. and click OK. Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. right-click Level 1. double-click Building Elevation. and notice the context menu includes options to rename. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. select the view in the Project Browser. and select Rename. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. and click OK. Black levels have no associated views. TIP To apply the template to multiple views.

make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. Using this dialog. and modify their properties accordingly. This tool provides freeform navigation for exterior and interior viewing. assign filters. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance. supply a view name. Create and modify schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar.29 To create additional 3D views. Modifying Views and View Templates | 141 . click . Save the view 32 To save the view. and click OK. on the View toolbar. You may want to add schedules to a template. click Schedule/Quantities. modify settings. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. click . select and order required fields. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. click Dynamically Modify Views 30 On the View toolbar. 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options. and click OK. select the category type. The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area. On the Filter tab. 34 If you want to add schedules to your template. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views.

click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . double-click the sheet number. Add sheets to the template 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and columns. select one. and modify their properties accordingly. To do so. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. modify settings. beams. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. 37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. 41 Create new sheets as needed. You are prompted to select a titleblock. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. 39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. select the default titleblock. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. 40 To rename or renumber the sheet. On the Appearance tab. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 36 Click OK. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. click Sheet. After the sheet is created. and click OK. Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. and click Rename. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often. Modifying Structural Settings You can create custom cutback distances for braces. Create custom symbolic representations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. select the titleblock and delete it. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click OK. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. modify settings. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. You can still add views to the sheet. or on the sheet itself.

and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint.3 Under General. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances: ■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam. Modifying Import/Export Settings | 143 . specify the desired line representation and offset as follows: ■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle. ■ 4 Under Brace Symbols. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created.) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 143. ■ 5 Click OK. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN.txt). Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs.

Using shared parameters.16). Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. 9 Click Save As. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. They cannot be shared with other projects. Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn. windows. and click Save. name the file. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template.txt) for MicroStation. and click Save.2 For each category. click Save As. and unlike shared parameters. they become the set mappings for the project. and so on. for example. and click Save. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you normally schedule a single category: rooms. When you create a multi-category schedule. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and related multi-category tags and schedules. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. 8 In the dialog. For example. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 . they cannot be used to tag objects. project parameters. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. 5 For each category. name the file. and so on. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. When you save these mappings to a text file. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. therefore. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. When you import a DWG or DXF file. click Save As. you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. doors. name the file. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. These settings are retained within the project template. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. When scheduling.

you can begin creating parameter groups. you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. and select Shared Parameter. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. click New. After the file is named. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 14 Click Add. select a group to which you want to add parameters. 24 Click Select. 22 Add project parameters as needed. and click OK when finished. 21 Click OK. This allows you to name the external parameter file. If a file already exists. 16 Under Name. select a parameter value type. 27 Click OK. 23 To add a shared project parameter. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.In this exercise. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. 2 Click Create. and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. 8 Under Parameters. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 3 Name and save the file. 25 Click OK. and specify the Type. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 145 . and click OK. you may want to save the file to a network location. 17 Under Discipline. 9 Name the parameter. enter a parameter name. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. add required parameters. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. select Project parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For each parameter group. you can create a list of parameters. click Add. 11 For each parameter group. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. select a parameter discipline type. 10 Click OK. Creating Named Print Settings. 7 Under Parameter group. under Groups. click New. and select a shared parameter. 5 Enter the group name. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 18 Under Type.

paper placement. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click Open. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. 34 Under Name. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. enter a name for the schedule. you can set options such as sheet sizes. Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. 2 Under Name. and print. click Schedule/Quantities. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. or consult the Help documentation. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . The tag is now part of the template.For information on creating multi-category tags. you need only select a setting. By creating named settings within the template. select the tag. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. and click OK. make minor modifications if necessary. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields. and add them to your default template file. click OK. 36 When you have completed the schedule. and the percent of actual size. you can load them into the template. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. For each printer. you create named print settings. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. Creating Named Print Settings on page 146.

4 Click Save As. click Setup. 5 In the New dialog. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 6 Modify the printer settings. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer.3 Under Settings. click New. Creating Named Print Settings | 147 . and create additional settings as needed.

148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. select a different printer. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. and click Save. By investing the time to individualize your template. click Setup. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. In addition. 17 Select Browse. 11 Click OK when finished. and click Open. click Browse. Set the template as your default template file 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. In this lesson. 22 Next to Default template file. select Template Files (*. 14 Under Save as type. TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project. 19 Click OK. you modified settings. and create new settings for this printer. This can provide a good starting point for a template.9 In the Print dialog. The only remaining task is to save it. 24 Click OK. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 21 Click the File Locations tab.rte). loaded components. 23 Navigate to the template location. and saved them to a template. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. If you need to share this file with others. 18 Select the template. you should save it to a network path. and click Open. 15 Name the template. select it. and save it as a template file. Use the template 16 To use the template. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. Your template is complete. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. You can also set this template as your default template.

Importing/Linking Drawing Files In this lesson. and Revit Architecture. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 149 . AutoCAD Architecture. Notice that Level 2 is bold. NOTE For training purposes. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 161. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File In this lesson. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns.dwg. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background. by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD.Starting a New Project 4 In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2009.rvt. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. and select Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Level2. click Training Files. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ Select Link and Current view only.

stairs and elevator opening symbols. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view. drag. 6 On the Options toolbar. paste. you cannot select individual elements in the linked model. Click Open. copy. click drawing area. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation. For Positioning. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. and rotate the view as one object. ■ ■ ■ For Colors. select Black and White. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 150 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . However. select Auto .NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views.Center to Center. 5 In the drawing area. click the imported/linked file. Exterior facade outlines.

7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. You can save the open file if you wish.dwg. expand Views (all). and select Imperial\i_RST_Import_ADT. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.rvt. click Training Files. ■ Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture. On the File menu. and expand Structural Plans. Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 151 . This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File In this lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. the file should be prepared as follows: ■ ■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1. 9 Select Halftone for the value of i_STR_CSM_Level2. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns.dwg. and select the latest available format. In the next tutorial. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. In the Xref Manager dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Export to AutoCAD. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. click Training Files. select the Imported Categories tab. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. Notice that Level 2 is bold. a new training file is supplied. In the next tutorial. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background. select each file and select Insert for Bind Type. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. NOTE For training purposes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. For Positioning. click Revit Structure drawing area.4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Colors. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. select Auto . click the imported/linked file. Exterior facade outlines. click the Imported Categories tab. 6 On the Options toolbar. 152 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . 5 In the drawing area. select Invert. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. Click Open. stairs.Origin to Origin. and elevator opening symbols.

10 On the View toolbar. click the linked file.9 Select Halftone for the value of i_RST_Import_ADT. enter -1' 0' for Base Offset. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 153 . 12 On the Options toolbar. and on the Option Bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click . The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. and click OK. click Partial Explode.dwg. 13 Select any column. do the following: ■ ■ . Click OK. 11 In the drawing area. Under Constraints.

select Project under Create New. Open a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. levels. a new training file is supplied. select Auto . and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements.rvt. click Training Files. and click OK. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.Notice the column adjusts to the change. Linking a Revit Architecture File In this exercise. You can copy grids. Notice that Level 2 is bold.Origin to Origin. select a template file. 2 In the New Project dialog. 6 Click Open. walls. for Positioning. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. 154 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . You can save the open file if desired. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers. Link a Revit Architecture file 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 5 In the Add Link dialog. 15 Close the Element Properties dialog. you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background. In the next tutorial. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Revit. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. columns.

click Revit Structure drawing area. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode Set options 12 On the Design Bar. 7 Enter ZF. 8 In the drawing area. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 9 On the Options toolbar. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 155 . 11 Click the imported Revit drawing.Exterior facade outlines. stairs and elevator opening symbols. click the linked file. click Options. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view.

Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. select Level 2. Grids. click Copy. make selections. 14 In the Columns dialog. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. under Additional Copy Parameters. click the Columns tab. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated. Copy grids 16 In the Project Browser. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. columns need to be split at each level. To select more than one grid. and Floors).The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. select Split Columns by Levels. When finished. Walls. Columns. and while pressing CTRL. under Structural Plans. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog. 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file. and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. 156 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Also. Therefore.

To select more than one level. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. and that the type from the new project will be used. press CTRL. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored. and that the type from the new project will be used. click Copy.NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. click OK. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. The warning can be ignored. After you select the grid. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. double-click Building Elevation. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 157 . click OK. Copying levels 19 In the Project Browser. and select each level.

After you select each level. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. click Finish Mode. and columns 22 In the Project Browser. click . The warning can be ignored. To select more than one element. Copy structural walls. select Level 1. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored. floors. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. 25 On the Design bar. and select each element. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. under Structural Plans. and that the type from the new project will be used. and on the Options Bar. 158 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. Change the structural usage of the copied elements 26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. click OK. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. click Copy. The warning can be ignored. press CTRL. After selecting each element.

32 In the Manage Links dialog. NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls.27 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ Linking a Revit Architecture File | 159 . and click OK. and click OK. Manage links 30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links. The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file. select Bearing for Structural Usage. ■ Select Overlay. columns. click the Revit tab. click . 29 In the Element Properties dialog. check the value for Structural. the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. Links will appear in the file they are linked into. 31 In the Manage Links dialog. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file. and floors. click Reference Type. so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements. 28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored. The linked Revit file is displayed. Click OK.

160 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project .33 Click File menu ➤ Close. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred. a new training file is supplied. Project Coordination on page 461. In a later tutorial. 34 Proceed to the next tutorial. You can save the open file if you wish. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. In the next tutorial. NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes.

Creating a Structural Model In this lesson. You also learn how to splice the columns.Creating a Structural Model 5 In this chapter. and then copy this framing to other levels. you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2. You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels. 161 . you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. After you copy columns.

which you use as a background drawing for placing columns. 162 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing In this exercise. click Grid. click Training Files. 1 On the View toolbar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Grids. Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. the imported drawing is a halftone. click structural model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Select the left vertical grid line. and enter A. 3 On the Options Bar. click . .rvt. 5 Click the value in the grid head. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Notice it is labeled B. 7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. Zoom in and out as needed.As you select subsequent grid lines. Notice it is grid L. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 163 . 8 When you get to grid I. and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the 10 Select the upper horizontal grid line. change the value to J. 9 On the View toolbar. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence. 6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A. The last vertical grid is K. click structural model. .

164 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Modify. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. 13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric. and enter 1 for the new value. click Grid. The bottom grid should be grid 5.11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. 17 On the Design Bar. click . Draw a grid using the arc tool 15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). click . 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Click the column to select the arc start point. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1.

Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 165 .20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint. 21 Click the column to set the arc radius.

22 On the Design Bar. 166 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and select the grid. click Modify. 24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown. Extend grid 23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding Structural Columns on page 167. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding Structural Columns | 167 .rvt. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2. The next exercise uses a new training file. Place columns at grid intersections 1 Enter ZF.

3 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Options Bar. click Structural Column. 5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33. Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display. and click Modelling. NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. click . click Finish. 168 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . right-click in the Design Bar.Level 2 plan view 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. Notice the new level is named Level 3. 12 On the Design Bar. H5. B5. Adjust location of the grid 18 Select grid head A. K4 A5. In addition. K2 G5. which are outside of the structure footprint. enter 2' 0" for Top Offset. J1. 16 Use the same method to create Level 4. H2. specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. and press DELETE. there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns. Under Constraints. K1 G2. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0". K5 K3. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 17 On the Design Bar. 15 On the left side of the elevation. 11 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset. J5. and click Select All Instances. Click OK. J2. 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ G1. click Modify. you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. and double-click South Elevation. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side. click ■ ■ ■ . NOTE If necessary. H1. Create new levels 13 In the Project Browser. Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. click Level. Adding Structural Columns | 169 . Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection. 8 Select the columns listed below.7 Press ESC. C5 Specify base and top of column elevations 9 Right-click the column located at C2.

double-click South Elevation. select Level 3 and Level 4. double-click Level 2. 24 In the Filter dialog. 27 In the Select Levels dialog. All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model. TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections. select Structural Columns. click Check None. or close the exercise file without saving changes.20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 170 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. The next exercise uses a new training file. 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Adding Horizontal Framing on page 171. and click OK. click File menu ➤ Save As. under Structural Plans. To save changes. 29 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Copy the columns to new levels 21 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Options Bar. click . 28 On the Design Bar.

Click Grid. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add girders 4 On the View toolbar. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. Specify Girder for Usage. 8 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. 6 Select grid lines H and J. Specify beam type 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector.Adding Horizontal Framing In this exercise. under Structural Plans. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. double-click Level 2. click Modify. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. click Training Files. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip. click . click Finish. click Beam. 7 On the Options Bar.rvt. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Horizontal Framing | 171 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

20 Click OK.Perspective. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane.9 On grids H and J. select Other. 15 On the Options Bar. expand 3D Views. 21 In the Project Browser. Copy the girders to levels above 17 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. for z-Direction Justification. delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5. 172 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 18 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 16 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased for training purposes. select Level 3 and Level 4. Set top of steel 14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3. and double-click East Section . 13 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for z-Direction Offset Value. enter -0' 7". click ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. Specify Girder for Usage. framing the bays with girders. 19 In the Select Levels dialog. and draw a girder from column to column. Click OK. and click Select All Instances. click Beam. NOTE In the following image. 12 Select a column center. Under Constraints.

under Structural Plans.NOTE If necessary. click Structural Beam System Properties. you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. click Sketch. select Center. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. enter 6' 0". Adding Beam Systems on page 173. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. click Training Files. Adding Beam Systems | 173 . 5 On the Design Bar. For Justification. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. To save changes. For Beam Type. click Beam System. you add beam systems to Level 2. select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. 7 Click OK. For Spacing. Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4. Under Pattern. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Sketch the beam system 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System. Adding Beam Systems In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

10 On the Design Bar. 174 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. click Pick Supports. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay. click Beam Direction. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3.8 On the Design Bar. In the next step you edit the beam direction. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction.

NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images.12 On the Design Bar. Adding Beam Systems | 175 . the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes. click Finish Sketch.

15 On the Design Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 14 When specifying the beam direction. click Finish Sketch. 176 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. For Beam Type. Under Pattern. For Number of Lines. select the girder between J2 and J3.13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. specify 2.

select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. For Beam Type. For Number of Lines. Adding Beam Systems | 177 . 21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .Automatically create a beam system 16 In the Project Browser. click Beam System. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 19 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. 22 Click to place the beam system. double-click Level 2. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. Under Pattern. under Structural Plans. Click OK. specify 3.

You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above. and press TAB until the beam system highlights. Copy the beam systems to levels above 26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system.24 Click to place the beam system. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines. 178 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. under 3D Views.Perspective. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Click OK. Adding Beam Systems | 179 . click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click East Sections . The next exercise uses a new training file. To save changes. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. Adding a Composite Deck on page 180.Beam system displays with dashed lines 27 Right-click on the beam system. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select Level 3 and Level 4. Notice the copied beam systems. 32 In the Project Browser. and click Select All Instances.

you add a composite deck to Level 2. 6 On the Design Bar. 180 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. click Lines. double-click Level 2. click Finish Sketch. 7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points. 3 On the Design Bar.rvt. enter -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Adding a Composite Deck In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Slab. Add composite deck 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Type. click Training Files. 5 Click OK. Under Constraints. and then sketch along the girders. under Structural Plans. click Floor Properties. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck. 8 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed. 10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 15 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 In the dialog. select Level 3 and Level 4. 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Modify. Adding a Composite Deck | 181 . and click OK. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck. double-click East Section . 14 In the Project Browser. Copy the slab to other levels 9 Select the slab. under 3D Views.Perspective.

rvt. 3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J. double-click Level 2. 182 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3: ■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint). click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. Use the Status Bar to see the snap point. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. or close the exercise file without saving changes. select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8. 6 In the Type Selector.To save changes. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and when it highlights. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Framing Elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. click Brace. Create the framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you add vertical bracing to a bay. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding Bracing In this exercise. double-click Elevation 1-a. Adding Bracing on page 182. and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point.

9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4. and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint. 8 Use the same method for the opposite brace. Adding Bracing | 183 .■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J. NOTE If necessary.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model. under Structural Plans. double-click East Section . you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add shear walls 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4. under 3D Views. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 184 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . The next exercise uses a new training file.Perspective. Adding Shear Walls In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Shear Walls on page 184. double-click Level 2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.10 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. click Training Files. To save changes.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Sketch 4 walls. tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Select Chain. For Depth.10" Concrete. click Structural Wall. specify Ground Level. 4 In the Type Selector. you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location. TIP After sketching the walls. Adding Shear Walls | 185 . select Basic Wall: Exterior .

TIP During selection. you add isolated foundations to column locations. click . under Structural Plans. click . 8 Select all 4 walls. Adding Isolated Foundations In this exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding Isolated Foundations on page 186. and click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. 9 On the Options Bar. 186 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. 3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements. specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint. Place isolated foundations 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 On the Options Bar.7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files. you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 2. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints.

select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. 11 In the drawing area. In your training file. . click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection. Under Analytical Model. 12 On the Design Bar. the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. enter 0' 0" for Base Offset. NOTE In the following image. 8 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Adding Isolated Foundations | 187 . 10 In the Type Selector. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. By default. the footing is placed at Ground Level. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. under Structural Plans.5 In the Filter dialog. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". click Modify. Select Structural Columns. Click OK. Under Analytical Model. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. double-click Ground Level. 6 On the Options Bar.

Click Grid. adding horizontal framing. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems. foundation. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. double-click East Section . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To save changes. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. and concrete wall framing. bracing. 188 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . or close the exercise file without saving changes. openings. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model. Add girders using the grid tool 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. click Beam. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Completing the Structural Model In previous lessons. click File menu ➤ Save As. Specify Girder for Usage. In the exercises that follow.13 In the Project Browser. you complete the structural model. click Training Files. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. under 3D Views. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. double-click Level 2. Completing the Structural Model on page 188. under Structural Plans. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 In this exercise.Perspective. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 189 . TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually. click Modify.NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. 7 On the Design Bar. click Finish. ■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda. 5 Draw a pick box around all the grids. click model. Manually add additional beams 8 On the View toolbar. Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. zooming in and out as needed: ■ Above grid line 1 between B and E. using the Grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. 6 On the Options Bar. . complete the framing of this bay. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises. Add beam chains to the following locations.

■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5. 190 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . ■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5.■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls.

Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. 17 On the Options Bar. select the top girder. 20 Click to place the beam system. Click OK. Under Pattern. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 3. 15 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. . For Number of Lines. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. click Beam System. click ■ ■ ■ . select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Under Constraints. 18 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 191 . click of the model. select Other. 13 Right-click. for z-Direction Justification. 14 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner 12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. Add a beam system to the bay 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for z-Direction Offset Value. 19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. and click Select All Instances.Specify the top of steel 11 On the View toolbar. enter -0' 7". Click OK.

For Number of Lines. Under Pattern. click Finish Sketch. trace the outline of the bay. 192 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 22 On the Options Bar. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. 26 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Sketch. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.Sketch a beam system 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 Using the sketch tool. click Beam System. enter 3. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule.

28 Click File menu ➤ Close. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 193 . If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted. ignore it.27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it.

under Structural Plans. click model. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 194.NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. Add cantilevered members and outriggers 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes. you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_3. Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. Lastly. a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 194 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . double-click Level 2. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. Adding Cantilevered Beams In this exercise. In addition. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. . In this new training file. beam systems have been added to all bays. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. Under Constraints. click ■ ■ ■ .3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. for z-Direction Justification. click Beam. Adding Cantilevered Beams | 195 . enter -0' 7". select Other. for z-Direction Offset Value. Click OK. Add cantilevers at columns 6 Select column A1 as the beam start point.

Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. click File menu ➤ Save As. Add intermediate cantilevers 13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger. 10 In the Type Selector. you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model. 196 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 196. add a cantilever beginning at column A2. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck In this exercise. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.8 Using the same method. To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Add an outrigger 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40.

Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. 3 On the Design Bar. additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. you can use a combination of lines including. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 197 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Floor Type. under Structural Plans. picked. click Lines. click Floor Properties. The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. click Training Files. 5 On the Design Bar. When sketching this deck. Garage Level-1. enter -0' 2". and Foundation. Add concrete slab with metal deck 1 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. straight.rvt. Roof. sketched. For Height Offset from Level. In addition. double-click Level 2. and arced. the following new levels were added: 5. 7. In this training file. 6. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_4. click Slab. Click OK. 6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges). and save the exercise file with a unique name. 8 On the View toolbar.TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall. 7 Click Finish Sketch. select Chain on the Options Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. click . To save changes. 198 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . The next exercise uses a new training file. and sketch a chain of continuous line segments.

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 199.

Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.

Add first stairway shaft opening 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the View Control Bar to make the change. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

7 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter -1' 0". For Base Offset, enter -1' 0". Click OK.

Adding Shafts | 199

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. 9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Add second stairway shaft opening 10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 12 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.

TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections. 14 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter 1' 0". For Base Offset, enter 1' 0". Click OK.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar, click .

200 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

18 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 201.

Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.

Copy Level 2 framing and deck 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.

Duplicating Framing | 201

8 On the View toolbar, click
Copied levels with stair openings

.

Modify roof and framing 9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 10 Select the floor. 11 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.

NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

202 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar, click 15 Select all framing and columns. NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections. , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

16 Press DELETE. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. Add cantilever beams and outriggers 17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam. 19 On the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage. 21 On the Options Bar, click .

Duplicating Framing | 203

22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other. Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 7". Click OK.

23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.

Extend the shaft to roof level 24 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

27 On the Options Bar, click
■ ■

.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following: For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. Click OK.

Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7 29 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area. 31 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

204 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 34 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar, click .

Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in the next training file. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 205.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_5.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 205

Open the roof framing section view 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage. Create new roof type 3 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

206 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation, and click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 9 In the Name dialog, enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - 4" Rigid Insulation, and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 3' 5 1/2", and click OK. Trace the outline of the roof

13 On the View toolbar, click structure. 14 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

, and enter 5" for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam.

17 Enter ZF. 18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 207

19 On the Toolbar, click

(Trim).

20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

208 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.

Edit the slab 23 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 25 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 26 Select specific supports.

27 On the Toolbar, click

.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 209

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 29 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. 31 On the View toolbar, click section view. , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab 32 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

210 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.

34 On the Options Bar, click

(Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.

NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines. 36 On the Design bar, click Modify. 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 211

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports. 39 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 41 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 42 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2' 9 1/2". Click OK.

43 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 44 Select specific supports.

45 On the Toolbar, click

.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

212 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.

47 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 49 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab. Draw split line to slope the variable layer 50 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.

52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 213

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected. 53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.

54 Sketch a split line.

55 Press ESC. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar, enter 5" for Elevation. 58 Press ENTER.

214 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 215 . click Modify. and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 65 Select the tapered roof.59 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click (Join Geometry). 60 Enter ZF. and on the Design Bar. Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support. 64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof. click . 62 On the View toolbar. Join the geometry of the roof types 63 On the Toolbar.

Atrium.66 In the Project Browser. To save changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Structural Plans. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 216. The next exercise uses a new training file. under 3D Views. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Open the plan view 1 In the Project Browser. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 216 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 68 Proceed to the next exercise. you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium. double-click Level 5. 2 On the View toolbar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab. double-click 3D . click . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab In this exercise. using the slab shape edit tools.

and is available for modification.3 Select the atrium curved slab. 4 On the Options Bar. The edge of the curved slab highlights. click (Draw Split Lines). click (Modify Sub-Elements). Sketch split lines 5 On the Options Bar. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 217 . Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar. 6 Click the center point of the slab arc.

click (Add New Points). Place a single drainage point 8 On the Options Bar.7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab. 9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line. 218 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

Notice that the shape edit points display. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 219 . 14 Select the split lines.Place additional points 10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab. and press DELETE. Delete split lines 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click . 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the curved slab.

17 On the View toolbar. The general shape of the curved slab displays. click . and enter -0’ 6”.Atrium. 220 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . under 3D Views. double-click 3D . View the atrium slab in 3D 16 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof.Set drainage point elevation 15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension. Notice that the edges of the curved slab display.

double-click Level 5. click Project to side.Atrium. click OK. 21 Select the slab. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point. 24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog. double-click Section 3. Set the curved edge condition 20 In the Project Browser. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 221 . . Complete the slab geometry 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 19 On the View toolbar. 22 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. for Curved Edge Condition. click Conform to Curve. click . double-click 3D .View section view of slab 18 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Slab Shape Edit. click section view. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections (Building Sections).

30 Click the center drainage point.27 On the Options Bar. enter SX (Snap to Point). click 28 On the Options Bar. and select the right endpoint of the curved slab. 29 Click the center drainage point. click . . and select the left endpoint of the curved slab. enter SX. 222 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. 32 In the Project Browser. 34 Select the atrium curved slab. under Structural Plans.Atrium. under 3D Views. click . double-click 3D . 36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0' 0". Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 223 . double-click Level 5. Verify the slab spot elevation 33 In the Project Browser.31 On the Design Bar.

under 3D Views. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.View the completed slab section 37 In the Project Browser. or close the exercise file without saving changes. double-click Section 3. double-click 3D . and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Select the slab.View. click Training Files. under Sections (Building Sections). you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection.rvt. . To save changes. Adding Miter Joins In this exercise. 38 On the View toolbar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. View the roof frame 1 In the Project Browser. click section view. click File menu ➤ Save As. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding Miter Joins on page 224. 224 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

You can now use the Beam Join Editor. Add the miter join 5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are available for edit. 4 On the View toolbar. The slab is now hidden. click . click (Edit Beam Joins). Adding Miter Joins | 225 . select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 On the Options Bar.

7 Click the arrow control on the first beam. 226 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 8 Click the arrow control on the second beam.

The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View). Adding Miter Joins | 227 .The miter join is complete. 9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join.

View the miter join in coarse view 10 On the View Control Bar. select Detail Level: Fine. Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined. Notice the miter lock remains locked. 228 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line. select Detail Level: Coarse. 12 On the View Control Bar.

under Structural Plans.Notice the miter lock remains locked. double-click Level 4. 13 On the Design Bar. The next exercise uses a new training file. you add a curved beam to the atrium. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams. Adding Curved Beams In this exercise. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. Adding Curved Beams | 229 . click Modify. Adding Curved Beams on page 229. 2 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To save changes. Zoom in on the atrium 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.

6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point. 4 In the Type Selector. click Beam. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. and click . select Chain.Place the curved beams 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 230 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

Adding Curved Beams | 231 .8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid.

Set the curved beam properties 11 Select one of the curved beams. place additional curved beams between the atrium columns. 10 Using the same method. 12 While pressing CTRL. 232 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select the remaining curved beams.The beam is placed. 9 Press ESC twice. click . 13 On the Options Bar.

enter 0' 0". enter 6' 0". Adding Curved Beams | 233 .Atrium. Click OK. Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of beam. under Structural Plans. View the analytical model of the curved beams 15 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . under Structural Plans. 16 Select the floor. Under Pattern. Click OK. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. enter -0' 7" for Start Level Offset Under Constraints. For Beam Type. For Maximum Spacing. select Top. Scroll down to Analytical Model. select Maximum Spacing. click Beam System. and for Vertical Projection.14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and on the View Control Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. select 3D. select Top of Beam. 22 Select the bottom beam. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. Add a beam system to the atrium 18 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. For Elevation. for Layout Rule. double-click 3D . enter -0' 7" for End Level Offset For z-Direction Justification. 21 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. double-click Level 4.

234 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 23 Using the same method.The beam system is placed. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium.

28 Select the floor. For Maximum discretized offset. and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. select Approximate Curve. click . 25 Select the beam. Click OK. and on the View Control Bar. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter. and on the Options Bar. 27 In the Project Browser. Adding Curved Beams | 235 .Approximate the curve of the analytical model 24 On the View toolbar. . enter 0' 4". Select Use hard-points. under Structural Plans. the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined. double-click 3D . NOTE When hard-points are enabled.Atrium. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Analytical Model.

The next exercise uses a new training file. double-click Ground Level. and save the exercise file with a unique name. To save changes.rvt. Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line. Adding an Opening on page 236. click Training Files. 236 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 1 In the Project Browser.29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. and draw a zoom box around the stairway. you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View toolbar. click . you then copy the opening to each level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding an Opening In this exercise. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close.

3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click Door. 6 Select the door opening. 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown. Adding an Opening | 237 . 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

select Level 2. 13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible. 9 In the Select Levels dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. 10 While pressing SHIFT. select Level 7.. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under 3D Views. 11 Click OK. 14 On the View toolbar. . so that levels 2-7 are highlighted. and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the 238 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 3D View. click stairway.

Adding an Opening in a Beam In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To save changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 239. you import the revised beam back into the project. expand 3D Views. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening. and double-click 3D View. Adding an Opening in a Beam | 239 . You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. Add an opening (by face) to a single beam 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. click . or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. Finally. you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save As.15 Click File menu ➤ Close. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.

5 Using the sketch tools. 8 In the Type Selector. click Modify. draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard. click Component. 240 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Finish Sketch. draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening. 9 Using the sketch tool. 6 On the Design Bar. Make sure the opening forms a closed loop.Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. Add stiffener plates to the opening 7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar.

You then modify the beam by adding an opening. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family In this exercise. click ■ ■ . or close the exercise file without saving changes. you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 241. for d. enter 0' 2". click File menu ➤ Save As. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally. 13 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Dimensions. select both stiffener plates. you load the new family into the project. 12 On the Options Bar.Change the stiffener plate properties 11 While pressing CTRL. 15 Continue with the next exercise. expand 3D Views. and double-click 3D View. The next exercise uses a new training file. and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor. click . Select the beam 1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 241 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Click OK. To save changes. click Training Files.rvt.

8 On the Family Design Bar.3 Select the beam. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing. click Name. Add an opening by extrusion 6 In the Family Project Browser. 13 Press ESC. click Edit Family. and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). 14 On the Family Design Bar. and double-click Front. 10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar. click located to the left of Offset. 12 Click the centerline of the beam. The Front elevation of the beam is displayed. 9 In the Work Plane dialog. The beam is displayed in a new window. Open the beam family 4 On the Options Bar. 242 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 7 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam. 5 In the Revit dialog. and draw a circle approximately as shown. under Specify a New Work Plane. click Modify. click . and click (Circle).

17 On the Options Bar. 23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 243 . 18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane. NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam. and the select the centerline of the circle. click (Align). and select the centerline of the circle. 24 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. regardless of the length. click (Align). 20 Press ESC. 21 On the Options Bar. .15 Select the circle. click . and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. click The centerline of the circle is now visible. 22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane. select the Center Mark Visible parameter. 25 On the View toolbar.

30 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder.26 Select the circle on the beam. 244 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges. and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam. and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening.rfa. Extrude the opening 28 Click the right directional arrow. 27 On the View Control toolbar.

rfa. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 245 . 32 In the Load into Projects dialog. 35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors. click . 36 While pressing CTRL. 33 Enter ZF. select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40.Load the modified beam family into the project 31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects.rvt located in the Imperial project file. 34 On the View toolbar. Select the new beam family 37 In the Type Selector. select the beams for Levels 2 through 4. and click OK. 38 Click in the drawing area. The project file reopens.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. In addition. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and walls are generated downward to the foundation. click Training Files. The next exercise uses a new training file. click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. 40 Continue with the next exercise. Adding Foundation Walls In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_6. you add structural walls. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7. Adding Foundation Walls on page 246. or close the exercise file without saving changes. In this new training file. 246 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. You add these walls using the Ground Level view. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes.The modified beams with openings display.

. Adding Foundation Walls | 247 . for Location Line. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. For Base Constraint. click 7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file. 4 On the Options Bar.Sketch the atrium walls 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Foundation. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter -0' 6". For Top Offset. under Structural Plans. select Basic Wall: Foundation . 3 In the Type Selector. The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you. select Wall Centerline.12" Concrete. click Structural Wall. double-click Ground Level.

click . 248 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . double-click 3D View.A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline. Sketch the remaining foundation walls 8 On the Options Bar. 12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible. 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch. On portions of the south wall. under 3D Views. 9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model. you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. and select Chain.

click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. 8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. 4 In the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under 3D Views.rvt. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click 3D View. If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. Adding Piers or Pilasters In this exercise. Adding Piers or Pilasters | 249 . add a concrete column centered on each steel column location. 3 In the Type Selector. click Structural Column. 9 On the View Control Bar.To save changes. Concrete pier centered on steel column 6 On the Design Bar. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. click Modify. and select the foundation wall chain. select Foundation for Depth. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Piers. and click Hide Element. double-click Ground Level. 7 In the Project Browser. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control. In addition. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 249. Add concrete piers 1 In the Project Browser. you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process. make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter. The next exercise uses a new training file. press TAB. such as the atrium. under Structural Plans.

click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_7. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. 250 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .rvt Frame ground and parking levels 1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. and concrete beam framing. 10 On the View Control Bar. For Height Offset From Level. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels In this exercise. double-click Ground Level.This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. The foundation wall is displayed. sloped slabs. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 250. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Type. enter 0. select 6" Concrete. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. 3 On the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. Click OK. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Slab. click Floor Properties. 5 On the Design Bar. To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

under 3D Views. TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 251 . double-click 3D View. use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face. 9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible.6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. If necessary. WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. 7 Click Finish Sketch. click Yes. NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom. click Delete Type. 8 In the Project Browser.

18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium. 12 In the Type Selector.Frame concrete girders 10 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select all grid lines. under Structural Plans. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. 17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. click Modify. It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined. and another between G4 and G5. 252 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select the line. click Beam. 15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT. expand the warning and select the framing element. This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3. 19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32. 20 On the Design Bar. click Grid. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution. click Finish. double-click Ground Level. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. It will display as selected in the drawing area.

NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible. 23 In the Filter dialog. Joist.Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1 21 Drag a pick box around the entire model. click . click Modify. double-click 3D View. under 3D Views. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 253 . and then click OK. 26 In the Select Levels dialog. click Check None. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. Other) and Floors. select Garage Level -1. 29 On the Design Bar. select Structural Framing (Girder. 24 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible. 27 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar.

double-click South Elevation. 36 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Garage Level-1. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click Garage Level -1. 35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure. 34 On the Design Bar. For Height Offset at Tail. enter 0' 6". click Lines. 40 On the Design Bar. 43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. enter 0. 254 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and select Element Properties. select Ground Level for Level at Tail. 33 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Level at Head. and click Hidden Line.Add the garage entrance exit ramp 30 In the Project Browser. click Slab. and click Hidden Line. 37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right. Click OK. For Height Offset at Head. 41 In the Project Browser. 39 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 38 Right-click the slope arrow. click Slope Arrow. under Structural Plans. click the Model Graphics Style control. 31 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 42 On the View Control Bar. 32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model.

under Number of Lines. and click OK. enter 5. Click OK. click Lines. click . select Structural Beam System Properties. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32. . under 3D Views. under Structural Views. Under Pattern. click Beam System. 52 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the ramp. 49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp. 45 On the View toolbar. and zoom in on the ramp. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value. 50 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Beam Type. select Pick a plane. For Value. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 255 . 48 In the Work Plane dialog. double-click 3D View. click 54 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. 53 On the View toolbar.Completed ramp Add a sloped beam system under the ramp 44 In the Project Browser. under Specify a new Work Plane. 55 Draw an outline of the ramp. select Ground Level. 47 On the Design Bar.

corner to corner. 61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp. click . 58 On the View toolbar. Add a wall opening at the garage entrance 59 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views. there are no drawing tools to select. 62 Sketch the opening. You can immediately draw the rectangular opening. When you are adding a wall opening. click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab. click . 57 In the Project Browser. and zoom in on the ramp. 60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 256 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp.56 On the Design Bar. double-click 3D View.

click File menu ➤ Save As. you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. 64 Select the garage opening. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model. Placing a Wall Foundation | 257 . In this case. To save changes. you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined. 63 On the Design Bar. Placing a Wall Foundation on page 257. or close the exercise file without saving changes. In addition. and save the exercise file with a unique name.NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. and continue with the next step. 66 Proceed to the final exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. Placing a Wall Foundation In this exercise. click Modify. click Unjoin Elements.

For Foundation Thickness. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A continuous foundation is added.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. under Structural Plans. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Foundation. click Edit/New. Under Dimensions. Place isolated foundation 10 On the View menu. enter 1' 6". and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation. enter 1' 6". 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. and click OK. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 1' 6". for Toe length. click 9 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Edit foundation properties 6 Select one of the foundation walls. 7 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. click Modify. Sketch the continuous foundation 1 In the Project Browser. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted. For Heel length. click Foundation ➤ Wall. and click to select the foundation wall chain. under Visibility. 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location. 13 In the Type Selector.rvt. 258 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 2 Enter ZF. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear Structural Framing. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18".

In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied. double-click 3D View. Precast Concrete on page 261.15 On the Design Bar. Placing a Wall Foundation | 259 . 18 Proceed to the next tutorial. under 3D Views. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. You can save the open file if you wish. 16 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

260 .

You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_Precast_Concrete. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. Adding a Beam System to the Structure In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 261 . In the first lesson. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure.Precast Concrete 6 In this tutorial. under Structural Plans. double-click Roof. click Training Files. click Beam System.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project. Creating a Precast Beam System In this lesson.

262 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 6 Click to place the beam system. enter 0' 1". 4 In the Element Properties dialog. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. under 3D Views. For Beam Type. For Justification. select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20". click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . double-click 3D. do the following: For Layout Rule. For Clear Spacing. select Clear Spacing. select Center. 5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. under Pattern. 7 In the Project Browser. The beam system is displayed.3 On the Options Bar. Click OK.

2 Click one of the precast beams as shown. Changing the Beam System Properties | 263 . i_RST_Precast-in progress. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Precast-in progress.8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click shown. 1 On the View Toolbar. Changing the Beam System Properties In this exercise.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam. Changing the Beam System Properties on page 263. . you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam.

under Structural Plans. under Construction. and click OK. you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam.rvt 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the beam system. double-click Section 1. The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam. 264 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . double-click Roof. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. under Sections (Building Section). 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 On the Options Bar. i_RST_Precast-in progress. click . enter 0' 5". Notice the spacing between each precast beam. and click Select All Instances. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.3 Right-click the selected beam. for Start and End Extension. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing In this exercise. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 264. 2 In the Project Browser.

Adding a Chamfer to the Beam In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 265 . under Construction. Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 265. double-click Section 1.4 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Building Section). and click OK. Modifying the Precast Beam Family In this lesson. you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. for Clear Spacing. enter 0' 0". you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family. You then import the revised beam back into the project. 8 Proceed to the next lesson. click . 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed.

266 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). and double-click Left. click Edit Family. i_RST_Precast-in progress. 3 In the Revit dialog. 4 In the Family Project Browser. The beam is displayed in a new window.Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Open the beam type for editing 1 Click one of the precast beams as shown. click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the beam.

12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. Click Apply. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. and then click OK. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile. 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. ■ ■ Under Visibility. Zoom in on the left tee of the beam 11 On the View Toolbar. click the Annotations Categories tab. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 267 . click Dimensions and Reference Planes. click .Open the beam profile 6 In the Family Project Browser. NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo. 8 In the Revit dialog. click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile. The reference planes and dimensions are now visible. and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. and click Edit.

268 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . and click Modify. for Is Reference. 17 Select the horizontal reference plane. 18 On the Options Bar. 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane. select Not a Reference. click Ref Plane. 15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". click Ref Plane. and click OK. 16 Press ESC. 19 In the Element Properties dialog.Draw horizontal reference plane 13 On the Design bar. under Options. click . Draw vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown.

under Options. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. 27 On the Options Bar. select Not a Reference. and click OK. 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". 26 While pressing CTRL.22 Press ESC. Add dimensions to each reference plane 29 On the Design Bar. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 269 . click Dimension. 24 Press ESC. and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. 25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown. for Is Reference. click . select both vertical reference planes.

NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam. 32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. 33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. 270 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. 34 Press ESC.31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown. Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam 35 On the View Toolbar. click .

37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align). and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown. Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane. 40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. 39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown. 42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee.36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam. Sketch new profile 43 Select the angled line as shown. 38 For the align-to point. 41 Press ESC. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 271 . select the vertical reference plane as shown.

Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam.44 Press DELETE. Snap to the end of the top horizontal line. 45 On the Design bar. 47 Press ESC. 46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows: ■ ■ ■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane. 272 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . click Lines.

Modify the right tee of the beam 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 51 On the View Toolbar. 50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 273 . click . and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam.

57 In the Reload Family dialog. 274 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. Align the bottom horizontal surface. 58 Proceed to the next tutorial. enter 6' 0". ■ ■ ■ ■ Draw vertical reference planes. If it does not. Click Apply. The beam should adapt to all changes. and click Yes. and then click OK. 54 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. fix any problems with alignment or constraints. Flex the design 53 On the Design bar. enter 10' 0". select Override parameter values of existing types.52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Tee Width. Add dimensions to each reference plane. Reload the family into the project 56 On the Design Bar. Creating Drawings on page 275. For Width. Sketch the new profile. click Load into Projects. 55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes.

you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2009. The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson. usually contain a title block. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. how to add views to the sheets. 275 . and section views. and how to create new views from a model. begin by first creating sheets. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. section. Sheets are defined by borders. you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. elevation. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project.Creating Drawings 7 In this tutorial. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. and are accessible from the Project Browser. and three-dimensional (3D) views. 3D view. which are a type of view in a project.

click Sheet. 6 Click OK. click Edit for Project Address. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. For Project Status. and click View. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box. right-click. 276 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered. For Project Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box. For Client Name. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Drawings. MA 12345. Create a sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 31 March 2006. enter Office Structure. enter the following address: 123 Main Street. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Training Files. and click OK. 4 Click OK. enter Initial Draft. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter J. enter 2006-01. Smith. For Project Number. Anytown.

Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number. 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. Add a plan view to the sheet 14 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter S-1. 13 Click OK. click Add View. 11 When the title block highlights. Change the sheet name and number in the title block 10 On the Design Bar. select Structural Plan: Level 2. and select the title block. 15 In the Views dialog box. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 . enter Plans and Elevations. on the Options Bar. click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet. and click to place the view. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 277 . The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ .Unnamed. 9 In the Project Browser. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all).

and click Element Properties. NOTE If necessary. 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet. and click OK. The scale of the view on the sheet changes.0" for View Scale. 27 Drag the title line under the elevation view. right-click. clear Crop View.0" for View Scale. under Graphics. right-click. 20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. specify 1/16" = 1'. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2. Under Extents. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Add View. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 278 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . and click Add View to Sheet. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view. and click View Properties. specify 1/16" = 1'. 22 In the Views dialog box. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'0". right-click. 26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. Add an elevation to the sheet 21 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 24 With the view selected. select Elevation: South Elevation.17 With the view selected.

Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 280. NOTE If necessary. and save the file as i_RST_Drawings-in progress. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view. 30 In the Views dialog box. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. and click Add View to Sheet. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. click Add View.rvt.Perspective.NOTE If necessary. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 279 . Add a 3D view to the sheet 29 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. select 3D View: East Section .

5 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view. under Sheets (all). 3 Select the title block. The new sheet. click . incrementally named S-2 Section Views.rvt. click Sheet. you add a new sheet to the project. is displayed in the Project Browser. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. add a section view. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. and click OK. under Identity Data. 280 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. and on the Options Bar. and adjust the scale of the view. Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. and click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 280.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click .0" for Scale. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Section. select 1/16" = 1'. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown. 5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). double-click Level 2. 2 On the View Toolbar. and add it to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans. Create a section view of Level 2. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 281 .

and click Add View to Sheet. 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 12 Drag the title line under the elevation view. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. select Section: Section 1. 282 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Create a callout view. under Sections (Building Sections). 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click. click Add View. and click OK.0" for View Scale. under Sheets (all). double-click S-2 Section Views. under Graphics. 10 With the view selected. specify 3/16" = 1' .■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line. and click Properties. 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. 6 In the Project Browser. NOTE If necessary. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. and add it to the sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Views dialog box. double click Section 1.

specify 3/4" = 1'. 24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 283 . and click OK. under Graphics. and position it approximately as shown. 21 With the view selected. 19 In the Project Browser. right-click. 20 In the Project Browser. as shown. double-click S-2 Section Views. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Callout. 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. and drag the view onto the sheet. under Sections (Building Sections). 18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure. click Callout of section 1. click .15 On the View Toolbar. and click Properties. under Sheets (all). 23 Drag the title line under the elevation view.0" for View Scale.

Creating a Detail Library on page 284. you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project.rvt. and double-click S. Instead of having to draw these details for every project. Save a group of views to the library 1 In the Project Browser. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save.TYPICAL DETAILS. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 284 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . expand Sheets (all).NOTE If necessary. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.1 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Save_Detail. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library In this exercise. you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details. Creating a Detail Library In this lesson. you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different projects.

2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 285 . select Drawing Sheet: S.TYPICAL DETAILS. Open the new folder. Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder. 4 In the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members. Enter Detail Library for the folder name.Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet. 3 In the Save Views dialog.1 . and click OK.

Save individual views to the library 5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects. Under Views. select Show drafting views only. when you insert these views into a new project.TYPICAL DETAILS. 6 In the Save Views dialog. enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details. Only the drafting views will be displayed.1 . 286 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Select both Footing Section views. ■ ■ 7 In the Save As dialog. Click Save. Click Save. do the following: ■ ■ In the list of views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. enter Footing Section. clear Drawing Sheet: S. only the 2D elements will be inserted.■ ■ Under File name. Click OK. NOTE When you save your file. Importing Details from the Library on page 287. For File name. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. however.

Click Open. Click OK.1 . and open Imperial\i_RST_Insert_Detail. you learn how import details from the newly created library. Insert drawing sheet from the library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on page 284 before proceeding. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Importing Details from the Library In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Importing Details from the Library | 287 . Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS. close the warning dialog that appears. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise. 2 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Look in.rvt. click Training Files.rvt. 3 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Select Drawing Sheet: S. Click OK.TYPICAL DETAILS. a duplicate types dialog displays. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. 4 Once the drawing sheet opens.

8 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ Under Views. Click Open. 288 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION. Insert separate footing sections from the library 6 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 7 In the Open dialog. expand Sheets (all). Select the file FOOTING SECTION.1 . and double-click S.5 In the Project Browser.TYPICAL DETAILS.rvt. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.

Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Click OK.■ Click OK. a duplicate types dialog appears. Importing Details from the Library | 289 .

10 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ For Look in. 290 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .rvt.9 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. Select the file Footing Sections.

11 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Under Views. a duplicate types dialog appears.■ Click Open. Importing Details from the Library | 291 . Click OK. select Drafting View: Footing Section 2. Click OK. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project.

13 Proceed to the next lesson. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. On construction documents. Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. 292 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . and so on). Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them.12 Click File menu ➤ Close. you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents. component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project. using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. On construction documents. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project. Finally. Using Legends on page 292. concrete schedule. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it.

and click OK. enter Symbol Legend for Name. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. and click Rename.Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru Creating a Symbol Legend | 293 . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand Legends. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Section Head . selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol . 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view.rvt. 2 In the Project Browser. click Symbol.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Right-click Legend 1. 4 In the Rename View dialog box.

enter 1/8" text for Name. click Duplicate. 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. you create a text type with the necessary size. 294 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . click Edit/New. 12 Under Text. and click OK. On the Design Bar. select Text: 1/4" Arial text.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click . and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 9 On the Options bar. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Text. Add text to the legend 13 In the Type Selector. enter 1/8" for Text Size. 8 In the Type Selector. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. and click OK twice.

expand Sheets (all).15 Working from the top down. click Modify to end the command. Creating a Symbol Legend | 295 .Spacer Weld Symbol . 17 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol . and click to place it.Melt thru Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Symbol Legend.Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. and double-click S-1 .

The symbol legend is added to the sheet. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied. 21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 297.

296 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

Scheduling

8

In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2009 projects.

Scheduling Beam Quantities
In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).

Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.

Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK. Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

297

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add. The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■

Comments Reference Level Family and Type

NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name. Under Type of Parameter, select Text. Click OK.

NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams. 8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.

298 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 299.

Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules.rvt.

Editing the family parameters 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. 2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.

Creating Shared Parameters | 299

3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types. 6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create. 10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. Click Save. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Name, enter b. Under Type of Parameter, select Length.

300 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Name, enter h. Under Type of Parameter, select Length. Click OK.

17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK. 19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK. NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. 25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project. 26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes. Remove Family and Type parameter 27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and select Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and click Remove. The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column. Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule 30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add. The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields. 31 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

Creating Shared Parameters | 301

32 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 302.

Creating a Type Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.

Modify the table elements 1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Mark, and enter MARK. Select b (Width), and enter W. Select h (Depth), and enter D. Select Comments, and enter REMARKS. Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.

NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has changed. 3 Select headings W and D. 4 On the Options bar, click Group.

302 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. 5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.

Select a filter 6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Filter tab. Select Reference Level for Filter by. Select Ground Level. Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level.

Format units 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format. 14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use project settings. Under Units, select Fractional inches. Under Rounding, select To the nearest 1/2".

Creating a Type Schedule | 303

Click OK.

15 Using the same method, format units for field h. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Columns W and D now display fractional inches.

Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule, and select Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add. The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields. 22 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

304 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

23 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.

Sort by Structural Usage 25 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sort by, select Structural Usage. Select Header. Select Footer.

Creating a Type Schedule | 305

■ ■

Select Blank Line. Click OK.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural usage.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 307.

306 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.

Add mark data 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Window menu, click Tile. The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file. 3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

4 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 307

6 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

7 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B2 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

308 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

9 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

10 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B3 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 309

Sort and filter the schedule by mark 12 Maximize the schedule window. 13 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals. Under Sort by, select Mark.

16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:

Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

310 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row.

Hide/unhide columns 18 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Fields, select Reference Level. Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field. Click OK.

21 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The Reference Level column is now hidden. NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide Column(s) from the drop-down menu. Rename existing rebar parameter 22 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 311

and click View Properties. Click OK. Add new rebar parameter 26 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Fields. Under Heading. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Fields. select REBAR. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 Under Scheduled fields. click OK. This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model. click Edit for Value. click OK. select Text. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Type of Parameter. click Add Parameter. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. Rebar will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog. Click OK. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. enter Bottom Bars. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. The new rebar field is added. click OK. 312 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 31 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Top Bars for Name. The Rebar field is renamed.24 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

For Joists B2. under the Fields parameter. click Training Files.rvt. Create the formula 1 In the Project Browser. select2-#5C. A new blank cell is created above the columns. To save changes. The schedule is updated with the joist information. and under Top Bars. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. Creating an Instance Schedule In this exercise. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit for Value. under Bottom Bars. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance. and under Top Bars. click File menu ➤ Save As. 35 Click the new heading. select 2-#5C. The next exercise uses a new training file. Creating an Instance Schedule on page 313. under Bottom Bars. under Bottom Bars. click Group. and under Top Bars. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Formula. For Joists B3. enter 2-#5 C. enter 2-#7A 1-#7B. Creating an Instance Schedule | 313 .Group rebar columns 33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings. enter 2-#5A 1-#5B. 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. Enter rebar data 36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows: ■ ■ ■ For Joists B1. enter 2-#6A 1-#6B. and enter REBAR. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. 34 On the Options bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure. and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

■ Click OK.4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and press ENTER. select Volume. Because cost is a type parameter. Under Available Fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. The schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. and click Add. enter 3 for Cost. click OK. Click Calculated Value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Available Fields. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic yard. Select Number for Type. 8 Under Joist B1. select Cost. 314 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Enter Volume*Cost/1'^3 for Formula. click OK. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type.

and click View Properties. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. enter 1. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.5 for Cost. click Field Format. click OK. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. and press ENTER. Under Fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. under Formatting. Under Unit Symbol. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. select Total Cost. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select 2 Decimal Places. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. Under Field formatting. Creating an Instance Schedule | 315 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. 9 Under Joist B2. Under Units. In the Format dialog. clear Use default settings. under Formatting. select Currency. click Edit for Value. Under Rounding. and click View Properties. Under Field Formatting.NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. select $. select Total Cost. click Edit for Value. Under Fields. Format total cost to include currency value 14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

click OK. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule In this lesson. The next lesson uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project. To save changes.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 316. 20 Proceed to the next lesson. click Training Files. The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ Click OK. 316 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Create the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. click OK.

select Foundation. click Graphical Column Schedule. click Edit for Hidden Levels. Garage Level . and click OK. The schedule is created automatically. click .Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Toolbar. and zoom in on the schedule. under Other. and Ground Level. Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. and select View Properties. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 317 .1. 4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. 2 Right-click the column schedule. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below. Columns located at off-grid locations 318 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between the grid and column.

and click OK. and for Grid Appearance. In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. for Below Bottom Level. Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single column. select Group Similar Locations.Columns displayed in plan view Grouping and formatting off-grid columns 7 Right-click the schedule. under Vertical Heights. enter 3". click Edit. under Horizontal Widths. For Column Locations. ■ In the Element Properties dialog. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 319 . enter 3". 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and select View Properties.

4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. Change the Schedule Appearance on page 320. click Training Files. under Text Appearance. click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and then select Bold. and then select Bold and Italic. For Level text.Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations In the graphical column schedule view. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and Group Similar Locations. Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections. To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. do the following: ■ ■ For Title text. and select View Properties. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. select Courier New from the drop-down list. Customize text 1 In the Project Browser. Change the Schedule Appearance In this exercise. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance.rvt. and select View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Right-click the schedule. click Edit for Value. under Graphical Column Schedules. you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 Right-click the schedule. double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Graphics. and click OK. 320 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next exercise uses a new training file.

5 Click the Grid Appearance tab. 6 Under Horizontal Widths: ■ ■ Enter 2" for Column Locations. Enter 2" for Level Names. under Identity Data. 7 Click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Steel Column Schedule for Title. Change the Schedule Appearance | 321 . 9 Click OK.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click OK. select Structural Column Tags. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule. 17 On the Options bar. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click Apply. 322 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . click Vertical. Click OK.Tag the columns 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Filter dialog. and clear Leader. 15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area. 13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. Under Orientation. 11 On the Options bar. clear Structural Columns. 12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag. click . click Tag ➤ By Category. select Vertical.

and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown. Change the Schedule Appearance | 323 . and zoom in on one of the column tags. click . Split the column schedule 21 Right-click the schedule. . click 20 On the Toolbar. and select View Properties.19 On the Toolbar.

enter Steel Column Schedule. 23 Click OK. and click OK. or close the exercise file without saving changes. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. The next exercise uses a new training file. do the following. 25 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. enter S-3. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise. expand Sheets (all). and select the titleblock. click Sheet. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser. click ■ ■ ■ . Under Sheet Number. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 324 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. 3 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Under View Scale. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on page 324. click Modify. The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment. Under Column Locations per Segment. Create a sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options bar. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To save changes. enter 10. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS. enter 1/4" = 1' . you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule.0".22 In the Element Properties dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. Click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

click OK. select Graphical Column Schedule. click . The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. and click Add View to Sheet. 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets. 13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 10 Select the schedule. enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. and on the Options Bar. and click to place the view. click ■ ■ ■ . under Extents. and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. and click OK. and select the titleblock. Add additional sheets 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Enter Steel Column Schedule for name. click Sheet.The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 325 . enter S-4. Under Sheet Number. 8 In the Views dialog. click Modify. expand Sheets (all). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Place remaining views 18 On the Project Browser. 15 On the Options bar. click Add View. Click OK. and double-click Sheet S-4. 14 On the Design Bar. select Steel Column Schedule. Add the column schedule to the sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design bar.

and drag it onto the sheet. 9 Under Directories. 22 On the Project Browser.rvt. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. click OK. 27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. under Database. and click to place the view. under Graphical Column Schedule. The next exercise uses a new training file.19 On the Project Browser. 6 Click Finish. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. select a location for the database file. 26 On the Project Browser. and click Next. 8 In the New Database dialog.mdb. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 10 When the confirmation message displays. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. under Database Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 326. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. To save changes. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant database. 25 On the Project Browser. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 3 Click New. expand Sheets (all). Export the schedule 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. under Graphical Column Schedule. click Training Files. and click Next. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and drag it onto the sheet. and click to place the view. enter Revit_Project. and drag it onto the sheet. and click OK to create the database. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. and click to place the view. click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info. and save the exercise file with a unique name. expand Sheets (all). and double-click Sheet S-6. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. click the File Data Source tab. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 326 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. under Graphical Column Schedule. and double-click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. click Create. click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. For example. Steel Details on page 329. so that each table of elements includes an ID column. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). To save changes.Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. The next tutorial uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 327 . instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type. 14 Proceed to the next tutorial.

328 .

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Prepare the welded brace elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_DET. and double-click Level 4. This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises: ■ ■ ■ Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection Setting Up Section Views on Sheets In this lesson. revise a callout view. You cut a section in plan. click Training Files. 329 . and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. and add these views to a sheet. 2 Select . and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail). you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based). Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. revise an existing elevation view. expand Views (all). Structural Plans. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Steel Details 9 In this tutorial.

Create the section view 6 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. click Section.0". 5 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E. double-click Level 4. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar.3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view. and select 3/4" =1' . and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 4 In the elevation view. select the elevation crop view. 7 Select . 330 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

13 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible.9 Draw a section as shown. Revise the callout view 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Select . 16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view. under Elevations (Building Elevation). A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall. and select 1/2" =1' . and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4. double-click West Elevation. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 331 . 12 Select the section crop view.0".

and callout views on the sheet 18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. elevation. right-click S-6 . Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 30 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. 25 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click Rename.Steel Details. and click Add View. 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet. enter Steel Details for Name.17 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed. and click OK. and click to place the view. select E1 30x42 Horizontal. select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet. select Section: Section 1. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Add View. and click to place the view. select Elevation: Elevation 1-a. 20 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view. 27 In the Views dialog. 19 In the Select a Title block dialog. 22 In the Sheet Title dialog. 29 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. right-click S-6 . right-click S-6 .Steel Details. Create a sheet and place the section. and click Add View.0". expand Sheets (all). 26 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Views dialog.Steel Details. 332 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and select 3/4" =1' .

you add a welded bracing detail. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). i_RST_DET-in progress.rvt. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing.rvt. 2 On the Toolbar. and a facade support detail to the model. a bolted angle detail. You will sketch the lines in a model view. Detailing Steel In this lesson. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double click Elevation 1-a. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_DET-in progress. . 33 Proceed to the next lesson.32 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Sketch line work 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the Detailing Steel | 333 . Detailing Steel on page 333. click braces meet at Level 4.

enter the value. 6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown. 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. 334 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange. click Detail Lines. TIP After establishing the line direction. and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.3 Select the left brace.

and select Copy. 14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown. click Detail Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. click . click Offset. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 335 . 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Numerical. and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value. 7 On the Options Bar. and click to place the detail line. 8 On the Options Bar. you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line. 11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it. A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line. enter 2' 6" for Offset.Next. 10 Click to place this line.

and select the horizontal detail line. click Detail Lines. click Modify. and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.15 On the Design Bar. 16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown. 336 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

click Modify. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both. Add weld symbols 19 In the Project Browser. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 337 . click the left top weld annotation. and press DELETE to delete this element. 25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. and click to place it. 20 Click Modify. and select the weld symbol. 21 Select the weld symbol. Repeat for the right bottom value. 22 Click the right top weld annotation. Repeat for the left bottom value. 24 On the Options Bar.18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. click Add a Leader. 23 On the Design Bar. drag it into the view as shown. and enter 3/8. and enter a period. The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0.

Under Graphics. 338 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown. and click Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. select Weld All Around. select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol. 27 Right-click the new weld symbol. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Structural. Click OK.

In the first part of the exercise.rvt. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Text.Label the angles and the plate 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. i_RST_DET-in progress. 32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. click Text. 31 Draw a text leader to the plate. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 339. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 339 . under Sections. click . 34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8. 1 In the Project Browser. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. 33 On the Options Bar. you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project. 30 On the Options Bar. TYPICAL for text as shown. and enter 3/8" PL for text. click . Then you add some annotations.

7 On the Options Bar. 3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown. 340 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .2 In the Project Browser. click Text. click . under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section. select L4x4x5/16. Add annotations 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown. click Detail Lines.

8 Enter the text notes as shown. In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you add members to support exterior wall glazing. 1 In the Project Browser. i_RST_DET-in progress. Creating a Facade Support Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click West Elevation. click Level 4 at Grid 4. Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 341. and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Creating a Facade Support Detail | 341 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. . 2 On the Toolbar.rvt.

select C5x6. On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall. 8 On the Edit toolbar. move it to the position shown. 342 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice. click . and select the left side of the column as shown. 6 Click Modify and select the channel. You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system. and click to place it.3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section.7.

select the back of the channel as shown. Creating a Facade Support Detail | 343 .9 Next. 10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown.

Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 344. You can save the open file if you wish. In the next lesson. 18 Proceed to the next lesson. Add annotations 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 In the Project Browser. 344 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown. click Text.7. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section. under Sheets. 13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6. select the bolt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure. a new training file is supplied.11 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drafting View Detail In this lesson. A325 BOLT.

select K-Series Bar Joist . Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown. enter Typical Detail .rvt. select Detail Component.Section: W18x35.Deck Span Transition.Deck Span Transition. 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam. click Drafting View. Click OK. Under Scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Side: 14K3. Create the drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Name. 11 On the Design bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail. and double-click Typical Detail . 5 In the Type Selector.0". 9 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 345 . select 1 1/2" = 1' . 2 In the New Drafting dialog. click Modify.Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Detail Component. Load detail components 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Drafting Views. click Training Files. 7 On the Design bar. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes .

select AISC Tube Shapes .12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click the end of the joist. 346 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click Modify. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Repeating Detail. select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck. 13 In the Type Selector.Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x. 16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck.125. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. click Modify. 17 On the Design bar. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown. select Detail Component.5 WR 22. 19 In the Type Selector. 23 In the Type Selector. 21 On the Design bar. 15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck. select Detail Component. select Roof Decking-Side: 1. 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown.

and select Symbol Right. select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3. and click to place it. clear Symbol Left. 31 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 28 Place the joist to the left of the beam.25 On the Design bar. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the bottom. Enter 3/16" for Bottom Weld Size. click Modify. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. drag it into the view as shown. Under Other. change the following instance parameters: Under Structural. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Add weld symbols 30 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. 27 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 29 On the Design bar. select Detail Component. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 347 . select Field Weld. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. 32 Select the weld symbol.

35 On the Options Bar. click Add a Leader. click Modify. 36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. 41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select the weld symbol. click Modify.34 On the Design Bar. 348 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . Add text to the detail view 37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown. 39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text. 38 On the Options Bar. 40 On the Design bar. click . click Text. click Text.

and navigate to a folder location of your choice. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 349 . Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 351.43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 44 Proceed to the next tutorial.

350 .

Reinforcement in a Beam In this exercise.Concrete Reinforcement Modelling 10 In this tutorial. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural project. 351 . Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities of Revit Structure. you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided with Revit Structure. you model reinforcement in a concrete beam. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reinforcement in a Beam Reinforcement in a Column Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Area Reinforcement in a Slab Path Reinforcement in a Slab Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Concrete Modelling Examples In this lesson.

This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. positioned to the right of the drawing area. and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located in the center of the drawing area. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. double-click Beam Detail. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 352 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . The Rebar Shape Browser launches. 2 On the Toolbar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Detail). click . and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf.

scroll down the list of available shapes. and select Rebar Shape: S3. Reinforcement in a Beam | 353 . 6 Hover over the section view. Place rebar parallel to the beam face 4 In the Type Selector. select Rebar Bar: #4. 7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge. For training purposes. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar.

16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Set rebar spacing 11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps. enter 0’ 6”. 14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view. and select Rebar Shape: 01. scroll down the list of available shapes. approximately as shown. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. click Modify. select Maximum Spacing. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. scroll down the list of available shapes. scroll down the list of available shapes. 9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. click Modify. 354 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .8 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 17 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. For Spacing. 10 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select Rebar Shape: T9. and select Rebar Shape: 01. 13 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser.

For Layout. select Rebar Bar: #6. approximately as shown.18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. Set rebar visibility 22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown. enter 4. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. Reinforcement in a Beam | 355 . select Fixed Number. For Quantity. and on the Options Bar. Set rebar spacing 20 Select the single rebar that you just placed.

26 In the Element Properties dialog. click .23 On the Options Bar. 29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. under Graphics. select Detail Level: Fine. select both View unobscured and View as solid. double-click 3D. click Edit for View Visibility States. View rebar in 3D 27 In the Project Browser. for 3D View. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. and click OK. click . 30 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown 356 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 28 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. click OK.

Modify the rebar length 31 On the Toolbar. Reinforcement in a Beam | 357 . click 32 Select the rebar as shown.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. . and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam.

358 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Reinforcement in a Column on page 359. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file.

and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf.rvt. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you model reinforcement in a concrete column. and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located in the center of the drawing area. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. double-click Column Detail. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. 2 On the Toolbar. Reinforcement in a Column | 359 .Reinforcement in a Column In this exercise. positioned to the right of the drawing area. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. click . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Detail Views (Detail). The Rebar Shape Browser launches. click Training Files. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes.

The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. Set rebar spacing 9 Select the rebar that you just placed. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge. select Rebar Bar: #4. Place rebar parallel to the column face 4 In the Type Selector.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 360 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select Maximum Spacing. 7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. scroll down the list of available shapes. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. and select Rebar Shape: T1. For Layout. enter 0’ 3”. select Rebar Bar: #4. For Spacing. 6 Hover over the section view. For training purposes. and on the Options Bar.

as shown.10 On the Design Bar. 13 Click to place a single rebar as shown. scroll down the list of available shapes. select Fixed Number. Place rebar perpendicular to the column face 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point. and select Rebar Shape: 00. Reinforcement in a Column | 361 . Copy the rebar 16 Select the rebar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. click Modify. enter 3. Set rebar spacing 14 Select the single rebar. click (Copy). 15 On the Design Bar. For Layout. 12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. 17 On the Edit toolbar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. For Quantity. select Rebar Bar: #8.

362 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown. Set rebar visibility 21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown.

View rebar in 3D 26 In the Project Browser. click . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 3D. select both View unobscured and View as solid. and click OK. click . 29 On the Toolbar. 24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.22 On the Options Bar. click OK. for 3D View. 27 On the View Control Bar. select Detail Level: Fine. click Edit for View Visibility States. under Graphics. under 3D Views. and draw a zoom box around the column as shown Reinforcement in a Column | 363 .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files. To save changes.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. 364 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall. click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. you model area reinforcement in a structural wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 364. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. 31 Proceed to the next exercise.

Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. 7 In the section view. under Structural Plans. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 365 .Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. 2 On the Toolbar. click Section. 6 On the View Control Bar.0" for Scale. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Garage Level-1. select 3/4" = 1' . click . and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. select the crop view.

Sketch the area reinforcement 8 Select the foundation wall. 366 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . under 3D Views. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D.

Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 367 . The foundation wall will be highlighted as shown below.10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. 11 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode.

click Major Direction Edge.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall. Minor bars will be placed perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position). and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown. click Finish Sketch. on the Design Bar. adjacent to the major bars. To change the major direction. Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. double-click Section 3. 14 In the Project Browser. 368 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline. 13 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Building Sections).

The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 369 . Remove the major bars 15 Select the area reinforcement.

click . clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction. and click OK. 370 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Layers. 16 On the Options Bar.

enter 30.Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines. Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers 18 In the Element Properties dialog. for Value. Click OK. Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction. For Interior Minor Number of Lines. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. select Fixed Number. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 371 . enter 30. and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall. under Layers. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines. For Interior Major Number of Lines. enter 30. under Construction. and click OK. enter 30.

28 Using the drag control. .Notice that additional bars are added to the section view. 22 On the Options Bar. 372 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. Change bar type 21 Select the Area Reinforcement. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK. click Add annotation 24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. change all Bar Types to #4. click Modify. move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Layers. and click Zoom to Fit. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. The next exercise uses a new training file. Area Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. double-click Garage Level-1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 373. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 373 . click . and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab. under Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the structure as shown. click Training Files.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. 2 On the Toolbar. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

For Model Graphics Style. select Fine. 374 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale.0". 6 On the View Control Bar. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. select 1/4" = 1' . For Detail Level. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown.3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select the crop view. select Shading w/Edges. 7 In the section view.

to enter sketch mode. draw an area reinforcement box as shown. under Structural Plans. double-click Garage Level -1. 10 On the Options Bar.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the concrete slab as shown. 11 Using the line tool. click . Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 375 .

376 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . double-click Section 4.12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Sections (Building Sections). 13 In the Project Browser.

Change the area reinforcement properties 14 Select the area reinforcement. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. click . 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. 24 Using the drag control. Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view. and click OK. 23 Select the rebar tag. under Layers. 19 On the Design Bar. click . click Modify. under Layers. and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. change all Bar Types to #4. Add annotation 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 377 . select Attached End. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. move the rebar tag approximately as shown.The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed. 22 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement. Change bar type 17 On the Options Bar. clear Top Major Direction.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure as shown. and open Imperial\i_RST_Path_Reinf. 2 On the Toolbar. click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. click Training Files. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. You are now in sketch mode. and save the exercise file with a unique name.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 378. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Select the slab opening. double-click Level 3. under Structural Plans. To save changes. 378 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click File menu ➤ Save As. Sketch the path reinforcement 1 In the Project Browser. Path Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise.rvt. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab.

8 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 379 .5 On the Options Bar. Change bar type 9 Select the Path Reinforcement. The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed. click . click Modify. click Finish Sketch. NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop. 6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown. and enter 1' 0" for Offset.

13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown. click Modify. 16 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. For Model Graphics Style. 17 In the section view.10 On the Options Bar. select #4. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale.Type. select Shading w/Edges. 380 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select Fine. select the crop view. and click OK. click Section. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown.0". For Detail Level. select 1/4" = 1' . for Primary Bar . under Layers. 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Create a section view . 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Tag ➤ By Category. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag. click 19 Select the rebar.NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 24 Select the rebar tag. . Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 381 . Change rebar properties 18 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening. 20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown. select Free End. 25 Using the drag control. click Modify. Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. and on the Options Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. Add annotation 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 Click the section line. 2 On the Toolbar. and position the upper drag bar as shown. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. . 382 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing.26 Click File menu ➤ Close. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Footing_Detail. Open section view 1 In the Project Browser. The next exercise uses a new training file. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. click structure. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 382. or close the exercise file without saving changes. double-click Ground Level. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. To save changes. draw a pick box.rvt.

Add wall keys at the bottom of wall 6 On the Toolbar.4 Press ESC. 5 Double-click the section bubble. The Section 1 view opens. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 383 . click . and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown.

9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing. 11 On the Design Bar. Sketch 3 lines as shown. select Boundary between faces. 7 On the Toolbar. 10 On the Design Bar. click (Edit Cut Profile). Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control Bar). 384 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .NOTE For training purposes. and click (Line). 8 On the Options Bar. select Chain. click Finish Sketch. click (Draw).

click Finish Sketch. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 385 . 20 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 19 On the Options Bar. Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. The Design Bar changes to sketch mode. 16 Press ESC. 21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown.Sketch rebar parallel to the footing 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 17 On the Sketch tab. click Sketch. click Sketch. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel.

26 Click OK. This rebar will not be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall. 23 On the Sketch tab.NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall. 22 Press ESC. Add hook 24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps. NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host. and click Element Properties. under Construction. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 386 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Finish Sketch. select Standard . for Hook At Start.90 deg.

click wall.Mirror the rebar 27 On the Options Bar. Place rebar perpendicular 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select the center reference plane of the structural 28 Click to place the rebar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 387 . 31 Select the end of the straight bar. select Rebar Bar: #8. 30 In the Type Selector. (Mirror). click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown.

enter 4". 38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. For Spacing. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. 33 On the Design Bar. 32 Click to place the first rebar as shown. 35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement. 388 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar. select Minimum Clear Spacing. click Modify. Place rebar set 34 Select the single rebar. 37 Select the rebar set. 36 On the Options Bar.

click (Edit Rebar Cover). Set rebar cover by element 40 On the Toolbar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 389 . (Pick Elements). click 42 Select the footing.39 On the Design Bar. Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines. 41 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

Click OK. 390 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 47 Select the face of the structural wall. click 46 On the Options Bar. For Setting. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Edit Cover Settings). enter 0' 2". Set rebar cover by face 45 On the Toolbar. 44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. enter Exposed/Cast against Earth. Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. .43 On the Options Bar. (Pick Faces). do the following: Click Add. For Description.

do the following: Under Description. 50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall. 49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. Check rebar clear spacing 51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Exposed/Cast against Earth. 52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 391 . click Dimension. Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. click ■ ■ .48 On the Options Bar. Click OK.

The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. click File menu ➤ Save As. 56 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array. The next exercise uses a new training file. 392 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met. 54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 393. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown. 55 Click File menu ➤ Close. 53 Click to select this plane. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes.

draw a pick box. 4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C. . click Modify.1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall. and open Imperial\i_RST_Wall_Detail. Create section view 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click structure. double-click Garage Level . and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. move the cursor down. and position the drag bar as shown.rvt. click Section. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 393 . click Training Files. 2 On the Toolbar. 6 Click the section line. 5 On the Design Bar.

10 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 Double-click the section bubble. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. and select 3/4" = 1'.0". Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 394 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .7 Press ESC. The Section 2 view opens. select the crop view. 9 In the section view.

until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement. 16 Press the SPACEBAR. 13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown. Place rebar set 15 Select the single rebar. 14 On the Design Bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 395 . select Maximum Spacing. select Rebar Bar : #7. click Modify. Place horizontal rebar 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ For Layout. 17 On the Options Bar. as shown. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular.NOTE For training purposes. 12 In the Type Selector. the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view.

and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level . click . enter 1' 6". 23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown. draw a zoom box. click Modify. Mirror the rebar set 21 Select the rebar set. 19 Select the rebar set. and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure. 20 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Edit toolbar.■ For Spacing. click (Mirror). The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level. 396 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Resize the rebar set 18 On the Toolbar.1.

28 On the Options Bar.24 Click to place the rebar. and click Zoom to Fit. 26 On the Toolbar. click Sketch. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 397 . click . 27 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Place vertical rebar 25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. 29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host. and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel.

37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears. 36 On the Edit toolbar. click . 34 On the Design Bar.You are now in sketch mode. 31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level .1. 30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point. 33 Press ESC. click Finish Sketch. 32 Click to place the rebar. 398 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover. Mirror the rebar 35 Click the vertical rebar.

Set rebar visibility 39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 399 .38 Click to place the rebar.

400 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown.40 Press CTRL.

42 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is visible. under 3D Views. 43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. select View unobscured and View as solid.41 On the Options Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click OK. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 401 . click Edit for View Visibility States. 45 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. click . for 3D View. under Graphics.

or close the exercise file without saving changes.47 On the Toolbar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. For Spacing. Notice the rebar is visible. enter 1' 6". select Maximum Spacing. 50 Proceed to the next tutorial. The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall. click File menu ➤ Save As. and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. and on the Options Bar. To save changes. Annotating and Dimensioning on page 403. click . 402 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 49 Click File menu ➤ Close. Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall 48 Select the single rebar.

4 When the centerline of the wall highlights. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Dimension. 3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. Create permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building. The dimension types include aligned.Annotating and Dimensioning 11 In this tutorial. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. and double-click Floor. select it. linear. click Training Files.rvt. multi-segmented. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. angular. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. Dimensioning In this lesson. By default. and open Imperial\i_RST_Dimensioning. In Revit Structure. baseline. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2009 projects. radial. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. 403 . and ordinate. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

404 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . toward the empty space outside the wall. select it. 6 Move the cursor to the left. and click to place the dimension.5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights.

select Wall centerlines for Prefer. 15 On the Options Bar. The lock displays as locked. and click to set the dimension location. (Undo). 8 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building. click Modify. select Wall faces for Prefer. click Create a multi-segmented dimension 12 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. 7 Click the lock. 11 Select the dimension. and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. 9 Select the north wall and move it upward. click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building. click the lock to unlock it. 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 405 . 10 On the Toolbar.The dimension displays in the drawing. Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. indicating that the dimension can be modified.

Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer.An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. click ■ ■ (Create Radial Dimensions). indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. In addition. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. 20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building: Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension. 19 On the Options Bar. 406 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. Create a radial dimension 18 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. ■ Creating Dimensions | 407 . and click to place the dimension. and verify that Wall faces is selected 28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building: Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening. and press DELETE. Create an angular dimension 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Dimension the curved wall again: Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). 24 On the Options Bar.The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline. as shown. Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. 22 On the Design Bar. and select Wall faces for Prefer. the default dimension option. 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click ■ ■ . click for Prefer. and place the dimension as shown. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. Select the inside face of the wall. click Dimension.

30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building: ■ In the top room on the left side of the building. 34 On the Options Bar. click OK. and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall of the south building as shown. click . ■ ■ 31 On the Design Bar. click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions). click Modify. 33 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. for Dimension String Type. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Dimension. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 In the Type Properties dialog. Move your cursor to the right. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR. click . and click to place the dimension. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room. . and OK. select Baseline. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. Click Apply. 38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown. 408 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .Create a linear dimension 29 On the Options Bar. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. Create a baseline dimension 32 On the Toolbar. select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join.

click OK. Create an ordinate dimension 42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps. click Edit/New. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Ordinate. 43 On the Options Bar. 40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown. . Creating Dimensions | 409 . 46 In the Element Properties dialog. for Dimension String Type. click . Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1).39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown. 41 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. and OK. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 45 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Modify.A. 50 In the Dimension Text dialog. 48 In the Dimension Text dialog. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ For Below. 51 On the Design Bar. Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension 47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2. 52 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S. click Replace with Text.M. Controlling Witness Line Location on page 411. 410 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text.I. under Text Fields. enter V. +/. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. and enter S.F. Click Apply and OK. (See Architectural Drawing).D. to each additional element (grids 2 through 5).A. 49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step.6" Click Apply and OK.Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid 1). do the following: ■ ■ Under Dimension value.rvt.

For example. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building. However. including the wall centerline. select it. When you place dimensions. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. but do not select anything. 11 Place the dimension as shown. in some cases. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. and select the exterior face. Each time you press TAB. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. and press TAB repeatedly. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights.rvt Override dimension defaults 1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise. 8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building. and select the exterior face. for a multi-segmented dimension. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. 3 On the Options Bar. Controlling Witness Line Location | 411 . you learn to add. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. click Dimension.Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. 6 Position the cursor over the wall. a different wall selection choice highlights. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. delete. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select it.

Edit dimension witness lines 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the dimension that you just placed. and control boxes display on each witness line. The dimension highlights. 412 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify.

15 Click the control box again. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. Controlling Witness Line Location | 413 . The witness line moves to interior wall face. but do not select it. 16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building.14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. and click Delete Witness Line. The witness line is deleted. 17 Right-click the control box.

i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. If you right-click the control box. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . click Edit/New. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions.rvt. The full dimension string is displayed. 2 On the Options Bar.18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. 414 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Modifying Dimension Properties on page 414. 20 To end the editing command. a context menu with different options is displayed. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Edit Witness Lines. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan.

then Up for Read Convention. In the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. 7 Click File menu ➤ Close. if 2 or more walls are colinear. Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 415. The dimension updates as shown. select Right. Under Text. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. and open Imperial\i_RST_Alignment. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on.rvt. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. For example.4 In the Type Properties dialog. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. a lock symbol immediately displays. click Modify. when sketching walls. not the direction it is read. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. a new training file is provided. 5 Click OK twice. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you create components. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 415 . change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. enter 3/16" for the Text Size. 6 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. 416 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . indicating that the Align command is active. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. click (Align). indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. The symbol changes to a closed lock. the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position.Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Toolbar. Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. 6 Select the short wall to the left. 5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align. Align the 3 short horizontal walls 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Click the lock. When you align 2 components. select Multiple Alignment. The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall.

8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. and drag it downward. 10 Select the middle horizontal wall. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. click (Undo) once to undo the move. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked). 11 On the Toolbar. 12 Click the right wall. click Modify. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 417 . 9 On the Design Bar. Do not lock this segment of the alignment.7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it.

16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall.Move the walls to verify the alignment. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. 418 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Align the windows on the floor plan 13 On the Toolbar. clear Multiple Alignment. click (Align).

A lock is displayed. 17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. click Modify. as shown. click . and align the windows. 20 Click the lock to unlock it. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall.The 2 windows align. on the Design Bar. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 419 . and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. 21 On the Toolbar. 19 To view the constraint. 22 Align the remaining windows. indicating the constraint.

you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Alignment-in progress. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 420. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.23 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. and notice that it includes 5 openings. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 1 View the south wall. 420 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . i_RST_Alignment-in progress.

click Dimension. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. a new training file is provided. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. select Openings and Widths. and click to add the dimension. You can save the open file if you wish. verify that Wall centerlines is selected. Working with Spot Dimensions on page 421. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Working with Spot Dimensions | 421 .2 On the Design Bar. The 2 vertical walls highlight. For Pick. Click Options. the windows). click (Create Aligned Dimensions). 6 Select the south wall. Working with Spot Dimensions In this exercise. In the next exercise. select Entire Walls. click Modify. 3 On the Options Bar. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. 5 Click OK. 7 Move your cursor below the south wall. For Prefer. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. and double-click New Roof. Move the cursor to the left. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof 1 In the Project Browser. click . select Leader. Click to create the second leader point. and open Imperial\i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown. click Training Files. expand Structural Plans. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 6 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof. 422 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click to place the spot dimension. select Current Level. and for Relative Base. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the left. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown. Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt.

select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative).■ On the Design Bar. and for Relative Base. Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension. . Move the cursor to the right. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. 11 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown. and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown. select Current Level. Working with Spot Dimensions | 423 . click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar. select Leader. 7 On the Options Bar. Click to place the spot dimension. click 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. Click to create the second leader point. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation.

15 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). Add a spot dimension to the footing 12 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown.■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . Move the cursor up and to the right. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. and double-click Foundation. expand Structural Plans. 424 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 13 On the Options Bar. select Leader. Click to create the second leader point. and Current Level for Relative Base. 17 Place the spot elevation as follows: ■ ■ ■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing. 16 On the Options Bar.

for Single/Upper Value Prefix. 21 On the Design Bar. Click to create the third leader point. 19 On the Options Bar. ■ Click OK. Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed. Working with Spot Dimensions | 425 . enter TOF=. click ■ . Change the spot dimension properties 18 Select the spot dimension. click Modify. do the following: Under Text. ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify.■ ■ Move the cursor to the right. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

Click Apply. click OK. and then OK. Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 Place the spot coordinate as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam. click . For Text Location. click Edit/New. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click South Elevation. 29 On the View Control Bar.Change the text orientation 22 Select the spot dimension. for Detail Level. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. select In-line with Leader. Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam 28 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Design Bar. select Medium. under Text. click Modify. ■ 426 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate.

33 On the Options Bar.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. Click to create the second leader point. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. Click Apply. Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates. click . Working with Spot Dimensions | 427 . On the Design Bar. enter EL. Click to place the spot coordinate. select In-line with Leader. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Change the spot coordinate orientation 32 Select the spot coordinate. click OK. For Text Location. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. For Elevation Indicator. click Modify. 37 On the Design Bar. and then OK. Move the cursor to the right.

In the next lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can save the open file if you wish. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. and open Imperial\i_RST_Annotations. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Annotating on page 428. click Beam Annotations. and add an end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure.38 Click File menu ➤ Close. you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view. 428 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and double-click Level 2.rvt. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tag beams in a plan view Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag Create a custom beam tag. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tagging Beams In this exercise. You also learn how to create a custom mark in place of an existing beam tag. click Training Files. Annotating In this lesson. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. a new training file is provided. expand Structural Plans. Tag all beams in plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

do the following: ■ ■ Under Placement. 5 On the Design Bar. for Horizontal End Offset. Click Settings. select All selected beams in current plan view. NOTE For training purposes. and click Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations. click Beam Annotations. enter 1". and click OK. Add an end-reaction value to specific beams 4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown. the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed from this view. 3 In the Beam Annotations dialog. 6 In the Beam Annotations dialog. do the following: ■ Under Placement. select All beams in current plan view. Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan view. Click OK. ■ ■ Tagging Beams | 429 .The Beam Annotations dialog opens. In the Placement Settings dialog.

430 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard. ■ ■ In the Beam Annotations dialog. Under Structural Framing Tag. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Structural Framing Tag. ■ Under Annotation location and type. Click . click OK. and click OK. under Analysis Results. click . ■ ■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog.Live. enter 10. under Select Element to Place. to specify the top-end annotation type as shown. The end reaction value is added to the selected beams. click the Level beams in plan tab. and click OK.This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location as indicated in the dialog. Enter the reaction force 7 On the Options Bar.0 kip for End Reaction .

. Create a custom type mark tag 10 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). 13 Click one of the W18X40 beams. 11 Right-click the open area above the model.9 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. click OK. and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Edit/New. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and then OK. . click Modify. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter W18. Tagging Beams | 431 . under Type Mark. 17 Click one of the W14X22 beams. enter W14. click Apply. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown. and then OK. click Apply. under Type Mark.

and click OK. click Edit Family. (Add 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes. Apply the new type mark tag to all beams 30 In the plan view. under Label. 432 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Structural Framing Tag . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select a folder location. 28 On the Family Design Bar. click Edit. click parameter(s) to a label). click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load into Projects. under Category Parameters.20 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click . 31 In the Type Selector. for Value. Edit the beam tag family 21 Click one of the W18X40 beam tags. click the W18X40 beam tag. click OK. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. and. while pressing CTRL. select Type Mark. Click Save. select the W14X22 beam tag. 24 In the Edit Label dialog. You are now in the Family Editor. The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. 22 Click the structural label. and on the Options bar. 29 In the Load into Projects dialog. 27 In the Save As dialog. Enter Structural Framing Tag . and click OK.by Type Mark: Standard.by Type Mark for File name. and on the Options Bar. select the active file.

33 On the Options bar.32 Enter ZF. 34 In the Filter dialog. click ■ ■ (Filter). and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown. Tagging Beams | 433 . do the following: Click Check None to clear all items. Select Structural Framing Tags.

■ Click OK. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. select Structural Framing Tag . 434 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the exercise file with a unique name.by Type Mark: Standard. Tag the beam system 37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 35 In the Type Selector. click File menu ➤ Save As. 36 To save your changes. and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown. The new beam tag is applied to all beams.

In the next exercise a new training file is provided. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. 2 Click one of the W14X22 beam tags. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 435 . You can save the open file if you wish. click Yes. 3 Click the structural label. and on the Options Bar. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Beam Tag In this exercise. 40 Click File ➤ Close. the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 435. You are now in the Family Editor. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. expand Structural Plans. 39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag. click Beam System Tag.rvt.NOTE For training purposes. Open the beam tag family 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_beam_tag. and notice the tag for the specific beam system displays. and double-click Level 2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply the tag to different beam types. click Edit Label. click Edit Family. click Training Files.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Prefix. select 3. enter ] (close bracket). select Camber Size. for Prefix. under Graphics. Select parameter 3. and select Break. add the following Label Parameters: ■ ■ Select parameter 1. and click OK. select Number of studs. Under Visibility. 436 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . (Add parameter). ■ 6 In the Edit Label dialog. for Spaces. . and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 2. enter S1. enter ( (left parenthesis). add the following categories: ■ Under Category Parameters. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 3. enter [ (open bracket). click . select Reference Planes. enter W14X22. ■ 5 In the Edit Label dialog. and for Suffix. for Sample Value. and for Suffix. click OK. 10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides).Add multiple categories to the beam label 4 In the Edit Label dialog. select Top. do the following: ■ ■ Click the Annotation Categories tab. for Sample Value. for Sample Value. 8 On the Options Bar. Align the beam tag 7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown. Select parameter 2. enter C=1/2". for Vertical Align. enter ) (right parenthesis). Under Category Parameters.

Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter. Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type. click Load into Project. click Override parameter values of existing types. In the Reload Family dialog. expand Structural Plans. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 437 . View the properties for beam type S2 17 In the Project Browser. and double-click Structural Framing Schedule. and the camber size for each beam type in the structure. 15 On the Design Bar.■ Click OK. expand Schedules/Quantities. 13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just below the horizontal reference plane as shown. 12 Select the text on the beam label. 14 Click Modify. and double-click Level 2. View the framing schedule 16 In the Project Browser. and click Yes.

Worksets on page 439.18 Click one of the W18x40 beams. ■ 21 Click File ➤ Save As. 438 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference. Click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the framing schedule. 19 On the Options Bar. click ■ . do the following: Under Structural.

You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment. Enable Worksharing 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. beams. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. however. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. You can enable Worksharing for any project. slabs. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. click Training Files. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users.Worksets 12 On many building projects. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. In this tutorial. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. this collection of building elements (such as roofs. engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task. In Revit Structure 2009. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file. Using Worksharing.rvt. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Worksets. In the next exercise. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure. All other team members can view this workset. and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. etc. they cannot make changes to it.) is called a workset. 439 .

and Views. under Show. click New. Project Standards. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. The Worksets dialog is displayed. 5 Under Show. Only User-Created worksets should display. a second user is assigned the roof. a third is assigned all beams and columns. 440 | Chapter 12 Worksets . In this simple training project. a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. For training purposes. In this case. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. clear Families. a small number of team members are working on the structural model.2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. enter Beams and Columns. one team member is assigned to the slabs. The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. and notice all are editable by you. 3 In the Worksets dialog. and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. imagine 5 users including yourself. Therefore. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. For training purposes. the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). 7 In the New Workset dialog.

enter Elevator Shafts. click New. Click OK. 10 In the Worksets dialog. ■ 12 In the Worksets dialog. enter Slabs. Click OK. 9 In the New Workset dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. 8 In the Worksets dialog. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view.■ Click OK. enter Foundation. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. click New. The foundation should only be visible in specific views. 11 In the New Workset dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 441 . Click OK. click New. 13 In the New Workset dialog. Clear Visible by default in all views.

15 In the New Workset dialog. Again. 17 In the New Workset dialog. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. this improves performance. enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files. Clear Visible by default in all views. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. ■ 18 In the Worksets dialog. click New. The roof should only be visible in specific views. 442 | Chapter 12 Worksets . enter Roof. Click OK. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. click New. 19 In the New Workset dialog. enter Garage Ramp. Clear Visible by default in all views. click New. Again. Click OK. Click OK. this improves performance. ■ 16 In the Worksets dialog.14 In the Worksets dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name.

25 In the Worksets dialog. for file name. select: ■ ■ ■ ■ User-Created Families Project Standards Views 26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps. 23 Click Save. click OK Create the central file 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As.You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 22 In the Save As dialog. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 443 .Central. The next step is to create the central file. enter Worksets Project . but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Non Editable. 20 In the Worksets dialog. under Show. 27 On the right side of the dialog. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Check in the worksets 24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. Now that you have created the central file.

30 In the Save to Central dialog. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project .In the Worksets dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and click Open. 28 In the Worksets dialog. notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing. under Comments. 33 Select the file. enter Initial Central File Setup. and click OK. Assigning Worksets on page 445. 35 In the Save As dialog. 36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name. click OK. Create a local file 32 Click File menu ➤ Open. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Close. and click Save. 444 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 31 After the file is saved.Central on the network drive. navigate to a folder on your local computer.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. for Workset. Assigning Worksets | 445 . 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. Assigning Worksets In this exercise.In this exercise. and created a local file. 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. and created new worksets to accommodate each team member. you assign the structural columns workset to User1. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. notice that all worksets are available for editing. You then created the central file. In the Worksets dialog. select Beams and Columns. click . you enabled Worksharing on a project. 6 Click OK. 4 On the Options Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. checked in all worksets. 2 Click Cancel. 3 Click one of the structural columns as shown.

click . 13 Select Structural Columns. 446 | Chapter 12 Worksets . notice that User1 is listed.The Worksets dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Filter dialog. under Borrowers for Workset1. and click OK. 9 Click Cancel. click Check None. Assign the structural columns 10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements.

Assigning Worksets | 447 . and click Make Elements Editable. The puzzle-piece icons disappear. and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable. click .All structural columns in the model are highlighted. 14 Right-click one of the columns. select Beams and Columns. but the columns remain highlighted. for Workset. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Options Bar.

clear Borrowed Elements. and click OK. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users. Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 448. Making the Entire Workset Editable In this exercise.17 Click OK. 2 Click Open. Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive. to save the local file. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. under After save relinguish editable. 19 In the Save to Central dialog. The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 448 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

8 In the Filter dialog. User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1. click Check None. notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. 4 In the Worksets dialog. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog. select Workset1.In the Worksets dialog. and select Floors. click . 5 Click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 449 . Assign the floor workset 6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements.

10 On the Options Bar. for Workset. 450 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 11 In the Element Properties dialog.9 Click OK. All floors are highlighted. click . 12 Click OK. select Slabs. The slabs are now assigned for Workset1.

Using the steps described in the previous procedure.Assign the roof workset 13 Select the roof as shown. assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts. Turn visibility on/off 17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof. 18 Enter VV. select Roof. for Workset. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 Click OK. The roof is now assigned for Workset1. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 451 . This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. click . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. foundation. 19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and the garage ramp. click the Worksets tab.

23 Check Beams and Columns. 452 | Chapter 12 Worksets . To turn off additional elements. click the Worksets tab. Roof. The elements are now visible in the view. 22 Enter VV. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and then click Apply and OK. Roof. clear the box next to the desired element. and then click Apply and OK.20 Clear Beams and Columns. Save to central file 24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and Slabs. and Slabs. 21 The elements are now hidden from the view.

please do so before continuing. For training purposes. under User name. 28 Click OK.25 In the Save to Central dialog. and check out worksets 6 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and reload the latest changes. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. one user has already created a local file. skip the following section. enter User 2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and click OK. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window. Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 453. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 4 Click the General Tab and. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 453 . 27 Under Comment. specifically sequenced. each user must check out worksets. instructions are staggered. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. If you have not yet completed these exercises. In the following section of this exercise. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and proceed to Create a local copy. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. Throughout the process. User 2: Create a local file. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. consider that person to be User 1. make elements editable. This is a system setting. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. For training purposes. and reset the User name to your computer login name. Create a local copy 5 In this exercise. 3 On the Settings menu. select: ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements 26 After the file is saved. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. two users access the central file through a network connection. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. return to the Settings dialog. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets. click Options.

22 Click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. You are now the owner of that workset. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. open it now. under Open Worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 16 Click OK. and click OK. and click Save. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and select Yes for Editable. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. select all the User-Created worksets. select Specify. 454 | Chapter 12 Worksets . expand 3D Views. If it is not open. and move it. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration. You now have a local copy of the project. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. 23 In the Project Browser. This file is for your use only. it becomes the active workset. click Options. 11 In the Save As dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. select the central file and.7 In the Open dialog. and select Yes for Editable. and double-click 3D-Atrium. and click OK. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset. In addition. If you only have one workset checked out. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. modify the structural model. 8 Click Open. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. User 1: Check out worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 15 Select the Foundation workset.

A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. and move it. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. select a footing. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 455 . 28 Click OK. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. expand 3D Views.

38 On the Design Bar. select Yes for Editable. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. and check out additional worksets 32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest. double-click Roof. Even though the Roof workset is active. However. 35 On the Project Browser. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Modify. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Beams and Columns worksets. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 In the Design Bar. 34 Select Roof. Click Yes. click the Worksets tab. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. This is because when the Roof workset was created. 456 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click Slab. 39 On the View menu. and click OK. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset. You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof. select Roof to turn on its visibility. and click OK.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. click Visibility/Graphics. under Structural Plans. click Pick Supports. 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. Therefore. The changes User 2 made are apparent. User 1: Reload latest worksets.

Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. At the appropriate point in this exercise. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. and click Open. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. throughout this training. you save the training file as a central file. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. In subsequent steps. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. leave this file open in its current state. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 457. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 457 . If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 44 Click OK. Check out worksets. In the final exercise of this tutorial. There are specific instructions for each user. if any User-Created worksets are not open. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. leave this file open in its current state. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. you need to set up your central and local files. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. In this exercise. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. 2 In the Worksets dialog. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. As each of you work. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. This exercise requires two users and. and these problems are rectified. select them.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. Each user must have network access to the central file. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. User 1: Check out worksets 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 43 In the Save to Central dialog. Each user checked out worksets. modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file.

A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and click OK. select a footing. After you submit the request. At this point. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. and double-click 3D-Atrium. select Foundation.3 Select the Foundation workset. select the Beams and Columns workset. 6 In the Worksets dialog. 11 Move the footing. select Beams and Columns. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. User 2: Check out worksets 5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. verify that Editable Only is cleared. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. You are now the owner of that workset. expand 3D Views. 4 Under Active Workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and select Yes for Editable. 458 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click File menu ➤ Editing Requests. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. You are now the owner of that workset. 7 Under Active Workset. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and select Yes for Editable. 9 On the Options Bar.

A message informs you that your request has been granted. you requested permission to edit the element. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 459 . you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 20 In the Save to Central dialog. User 2: Check for editability grant 17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. to Local. 18 Click OK. select the request submitted by User 2. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. Project Coordination on page 461. and close 19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. select the following. and notice the footing is in the new location. click Check Now. and click OK. In this case. 16 Click Close. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Click Grant.14 In the Editing Requests dialog. In this multi-user exercise. and the other user granted it.

460 .

461 . and open Imperial\i_RST_Coordination. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. a warning is displayed. and columns for any future modifications. you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file. floors. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. Finally. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2009 model. rejected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this tutorial. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started. which can be accepted. reviews each change individually. Once each change has been reviewed. levels. Coordination Review In this lesson. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids. Click OK to open the file. you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. Starting a New Project on page 149. or postponed. and the copy monitor feature was activated.rvt NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure. Finally. In the tutorial. all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door. depending on the impact to the design. click Training Files. walls.Project Coordination 13 You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design.

select the Revit Links tab. 8 On the View Toolbar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Level 3. select Coordination for Discipline. 5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.rvt. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway.1 In the Project Browser. 7 Enter ZF. under Structural Plans. click Apply. The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. click . and then click OK. and click OK. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Click . 462 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible. 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B. under Graphics. 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After.

Click to select the linked file. and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. click as shown. Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. The Revit Architecture file is highlighted. On the View Control Bar. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft. The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows. click Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 463 . Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. . . and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown. 10 On the Toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. and click Wireframe. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window: ■ ■ ■ Select .

Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window. Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete. select the remaining messages. or changed in some way from the architect’s file. Actions include: Postpone. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches. These messages identify elements that were deleted.The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. and then click Show. Review change to Floor Sketch 15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible. press SHIFT. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete. moved. Reject. ■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches. In the Action column. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. Accept Difference. ■ 464 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different. and click Apply. and click Show. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view.

The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window. do the following: ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved. select Modify Grid B. 18 In the Coordination Review dialog. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view. Review location of elevator walls 19 On the Toolbar.The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change. Click the message i_RBD_After. Review location of grid B 17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible.rvt: Grids: Grid:B. and click Show. and click Apply. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 465 . click . ■ For Action.

Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different. There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. ■ ■ 466 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . expand Maintain wall position. do the following: ■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls. press SHIFT. and select the remaining messages. select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry. For Action. and click Apply. Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view.20 In the Coordination Review dialog.

Click the Add Comment field. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation . In the Coordination Review dialog. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Coordination-in progress. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. ■ ■ In the Edit Comment dialog. enter Need to discuss with architect. and OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. In the Edit Comment dialog. click Apply. Select Postpone for Action. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing. 22 In the Coordination Review dialog.The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. Review wall modifications 21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 467 .12" Concrete.rvt. The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic . enter Need to discuss with architect. Select Postpone for Action. Click OK.8" Masonry. Click the Add Comment field.

rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. Interference Check on page 468. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. select i_RBD_After.24 Proceed to the next exercise. The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project. The default table compares elements within the same project. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway. 2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Interference Check In this exercise. 468 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . i_RST_Coordination-in progress.rvt for Categories from.

Interference Check | 469 .Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project. and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project. select Structural Columns. Run interference check on columns and stairs 3 In the list for the current project.

do the following: ■ Under Structural Columns. expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown. A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project. 470 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 5 In the Interference Report dialog.4 Click OK.

select Revit Interference Report (*. ■ Select i_RBD_After. Interference Check | 471 . Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window. ■ ■ Export the Column interference report 6 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in.rvt: Stairs: Stair: 7" max riser 11" tread. Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W10X33. Under File name. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. Under Save as type. select a folder location on your local computer. Each representing a different level. Stair Check. and that it interferes with the stairway. Click Export to generate an interference report.There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway.html). Click Save. enter Columns vs.

11 Click OK.rvt for Categories from. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway. Run interference check on vertical bracing 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. click Close. 10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project.7 In the Interference Report dialog. and Doors for the Revit Architecture project. select i_RBD_After. 9 In the Interference Check dialog. 472 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .

■ Click Export to generate an interference report. Export the Brace and Door interference report 13 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. Under File name. Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows. Select i_RBD_After. Under Save as type. select a folder location on your local computer.rvt: Doors: Door Single. also the brace interferes with the opening. Door opening. select Revit Interference Report (*.html). enter Brace vs. do the following: ■ ■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors. Interference Check | 473 . Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows. Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4 ■ .12 In the Interference Report dialog.

the revision is locked and issued to the field. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. In general. and open Imperial\i_RST_Revision. click Training Files. Setting Up a Revision Table Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Using Revision Tracking Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. This is the date the revisions were identified. and enter 2/15/06. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. 15 In the Interference Report dialog. yet as concise as possible. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Revisions. if the active revision is number 1. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. When you use this option. click Close. You can create a sequence of revisions. 474 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . If you select By Project. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 2 In the Revisions dialog.■ Click Save. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method. a new training file is provided. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Using Revision Tracking on page 474. In the next lesson. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. When Issued is selected. Add a revision for grid B 3 Click on the value for Release Date. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog.rvt. 4 Click on the value for Description. For example.

If Visible is not selected. In most instances. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Add a revision cloud for grid B 1 In the Project Browser. you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. click near grid line B. 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. Sketching Revision Clouds | 475 . any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). click Revision Cloud. including revision number and revision date. Sketching Revision Clouds on page 475. 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 4 In the drawing area. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. double-click S. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views.Level 3 Framing Plan. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. and select Activate View. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.1 . allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. and OK. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 7 Click Apply. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. However.

When Issued is selected. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 4 Click on the value for Description. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a revision for the elevator stairs 1 On the Settings menu. Add Remaining Revisions on page 476.rvt. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Revision-in progress. yet as concise as possible. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. i_RST_Revision-in progress. Add Remaining Revisions In this exercise. 2 In the Revisions dialog. the revision is locked and issued to the field. NOTE At this point. In this tutorial. In general.rvt. the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. 476 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . click Finish Sketch. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. click Revisions.7 On the Design Bar. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. the remaining revisions for the project are documented. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. click Add: New. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line. and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. and enter 2/20/06. 3 Click on the value for Release Date. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. click above the elevator shaft. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. In most instances.If Visible is not selected. Add a revision for the brace interference 12 In the Revisions dialog. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. 13 Click on the value for Release Date. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Add: New. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and enter 2/21/06. click Revision Cloud. 11 On the Design Bar. and enter Research brace. 14 Click on the value for Description. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 8 In the drawing area. Add Remaining Revisions | 477 .

18 Right-click the center view on the sheet. When Issued is selected. 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.Stair Shafts Sections. under Sheets (all). Add a revision cloud for the brace interference 17 In the Project Browser. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. the revision is locked and issued to the field. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. yet as concise as possible. 15 Verify that Issued is cleared.In general. click above the brace. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. click Revision Cloud. 16 Verify that Visible is selected. 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. 478 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .2 . any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. and select Activate View. In most instances. If Visible is not selected. double-click S.

and enter Research door. 27 Verify that Issued is cleared. 25 Click on the value for Release Date. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. Add a revision for the door interference 24 In the Revisions dialog. click Add: New. the revision is locked and issued to the field. When Issued is selected. In general. Add Remaining Revisions | 479 . 28 Verify that Visible is selected. click Finish Sketch.23 On the Design Bar. yet as concise as possible. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and enter 2/22/06. 26 Click on the value for Description. The revision cloud is displayed around the brace.

allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. In most instances. 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. i_RST_Revision-in progress.If Visible is not selected. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 35 On the Design Bar. 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet. under Sheets (all). and select Activate View. 34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Finish Sketch. double-click S. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 32 In the drawing area. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode.2 . Add a revision cloud for the door interference 29 In the Project Browser. Tagging Revision Clouds on page 480. The revision cloud is displayed around the door. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. click above the door.rvt. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.Stair Shafts Sections. click Revision Cloud. 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 480 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet.

4 On the Options Bar. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.Place a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B. Working with Revisions In this exercise.Level 3 Framing Plan. and select Activate View. i_RST_Revision-in progress. and lock it from further changes. and because the revision is the first in the project. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. Because you chose to number by sheet.rvt. Working with Revisions | 481 . allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. and then issue the revisions to create a record. double-click S. clear Leader. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. under Sheets (all). 2 Right-click the view on the sheet.1 . 5 In the drawing area. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Working with Revisions on page 481. you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 6 Click to place the tag. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds.

You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. under Sheets (all). and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown.1 . under Sheets (all). you can no longer modify it. Issue a revision 5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 2 Select .Stair Shafts Sections. you prevent further changes to the revision. click Revisions. 4 Select . 6 Select Issued for each revision entry. double-click S. double-click S. On the Settings menu.Level 3 Framing Plan.View the revisions 1 In the Project Browser. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 3 In the Project Browser. You do this by issuing the revision. 482 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. and click OK.2 . NOTE After you issue a revision.

7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. Structural Analytical Modelling on page 485. Working with Revisions | 483 . 8 Proceed to the next tutorial.

484 .

You can apply a template to an existing or new view. quantity take off. Views and View Templates are not linked. Discipline. loads and load combinations. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. As you create objects and the physical model. you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software. 485 . geometry. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view. Detail level. you can apply that same template to a 3D view. To update a view. Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process Revit Structure combines 2 models. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. The physical model that is used for documentation. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. For example. interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. All views created with that template are not automatically updated. material properties. if you save a template from a plan view. The analytical model consists of structural components. When working with the analytical model. View Templates help standardize the look of all views. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. component properties. you can reapply the modified template. the template is still applied to the 3D view. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both.Structural Analytical Modelling 14 In this tutorial.

rvt. Apply the view template 1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you learn how to check member supports. The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown. The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 486 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Select View Template dialog.Analytical Checks In this exercise. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly. and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below. select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick.

applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed. 5 Close the Warning dialog. This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog. Review support warnings 6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. wall. Check member supports 3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports. 4 In the Warning dialog click . under the Analytical Model Settings tab. Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. Analytical Checks | 487 . to view each warning. or isolated). select the Analytical Model Settings tab. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. Verify analytical settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog.NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view.

7 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33 ■ ■ Click Show. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. 488 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. 9 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning Click Structural Framing: W-Wide Flange-Column: W18X40 ■ Click Show. Analytical Checks | 489 . Review circular reference warnings 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing.

click Modify. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Correct member supports 11 In the Project Browser. H-3. click Close. double-click Level 2. under Structural Plans. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. E-3. D-2. and H-4. double-click Ground Level. D-4. Correct circular reference 15 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Design bar. 10 In the Warning dialog.■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1. Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end. under Structural Plans. 490 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown.

2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. 6 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning. 4 Close the Warning dialog.Run a consistency check 1 In the Project Browser. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X49 Analytical Checks | 491 . 3 In the Warning dialog. expand 3D Views. click to view each warning. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. Review warnings 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. and double-click 3D. This indicates the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length. Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models.

click . Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted. In the Element Properties dialog. notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection.■ ■ Click Show. and on the Options Bar. 492 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 7 In the Warning dialog. under Analytical Model. The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. click Close.

Correct zero-length elements 10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit). 11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible as shown.9 In the Element Properties dialog. Analytical Checks | 493 . click OK. and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown. 12 Press CTRL.

You can save the open file if you wish. a new training file is provided. The Warning dialog does not appear. Load Cases In the Structural Settings dialog. 14 Under Analytical Model. for Top Vertical Projection. click OK. you edit and add load cases. 494 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Top of Column. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Load Cases on page 494. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. click . In the next exercise. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed.13 On the Options Bar.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table. 3 Click Add. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the Load Cases tab. Load Cases | 495 . 5 Under Category. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. 2 Click Add. Revit Structure provides a default number. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. Add a load nature 1 Click in the Load Natures table. 4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. click Training Files. you add or delete load natures. and the Add button changes to Duplicate. select Dead Loads. or delete load cases. and rename it to Roof Hung. edit. Select an existing load case record in the table. In this table. In this table. then click Duplicate. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM3. In this exercise.The first table is the Load Cases table. you learn how to add new load cases. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. The selected load case is copied in the table. The second table is the Load Natures table. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. Add a Load Case 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings.rvt. you add.

and loads can be placed by default. 4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog. and double-click View 1 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 496 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . expand 3D Views. expand Views (all).Analytical.3 Click in the cell of the new load nature. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 6 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.rvt Change the coordinate system orientation 1 In the Project Browser. live loads. you will be adding dead loads. and enter an appropriate name. Adding Loads to the Model on page 496. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table. perpendicular to the host’s work plane. The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated: A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. Hosts include slabs and beams. and wind loads to the model. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Adding Loads to the Model Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads: ■ ■ ■ project coordinate system current work plane host work plane The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. using the project coordinate system. A host for a load has its own work plane. In this exercise.

select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection. click (Area Load). 8 On the Options Bar.2 On the View Control Bar. draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it. Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. Adding Loads to the Model | 497 . 4 Select . under Analytical Model. 3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible. 5 On the Options Bar. and click Hidden Line. TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. . select 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Loads. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 Click the garage sloped slab. and click OK. click the Model Graphics Style control.

click 13 Click OK. expand Views (all). 11 Select the load. . Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host 1 In the Project Browser. click (Area Load). click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar.The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp). and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Project for Orient to. 498 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . expand Structural Plans. under Structural Analysis. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The load coordinates are now parallel to the project. click Loads. and double-click Level 2-Analytical. 3 On the Options Bar.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Loads. under Structural Plans.TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. click Modify to exit the Loads tool. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Loads to the Model | 499 . Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 7 Right-click on the load you placed. enter -0. Add wind load at Level 2 9 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar.0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown. select Area Load: Area Load 1. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Element Properties. double-click Level 2-Analytical. and click OK.

Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 14 Right-click on the Line Load 1. TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load. enter Wind Load. 13 On the Design Bar.0400 kip/ft for Fx 1 500 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . do the following: ■ ■ Enter 0 kip/ft for Fz 1 Enter 0. click Duplicate. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting Line Load 1. 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other. click (Line Load). 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click Element Properties. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.11 On the Options Bar. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. click Modify. and click OK. as shown.

double-click Level 2 .Analytical in order to view the added loads. expand 3D Views. click the Model Graphics Style control. and click OK. and double-click View 1 . 18 In the Project Browser. and click Hidden Line. 21 Select . under Structural Plans. Adding Loads to the Model | 501 . expand Views (all). 20 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View Control Bar.Analytical. draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown.■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case.

22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 502 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Grid. 23 Draw a temporary grid as shown.

This grid is drawn for reference only. The elevation view opens. 27 Select the temporary grid. 29 Select . 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble. 25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown. click Framing Elevation. draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown. and press DELETE. Adding Loads to the Model | 503 . click Modify. and will be deleted in a later step. 26 On the Design bar. 24 On the View tab of the Design bar.

click Loads. The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing. 31 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load. 504 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 34 Select the load. 33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other.30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Line Load). 35 In the Element Properties dialog. select Workplane for Orient to. under Structural Analysis. 32 On Level 2. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. and on the Options Bar. as shown.

3 Click Add in the Load Combination section. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 7 Under Case or Combination.36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 Click Add. 9 Under Factor. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor.4. 6 Under Factor. 4 Under Name. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table.rvt.6.rvt Add a DL + LL combination 1 On the Settings menu. Load Combination In this exercise. enter 1. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. click Structural Settings. and click Add. enter 1. select LL1. click the Load Combinations tab. select DL1. 10 Under Case or Combination. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Load Combination on page 505. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software. enter DL+LL. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. Load Combination | 505 .

18 Under Case or Combination. 23 Select Row 2. 13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table.3.Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor 11 Click on the Load Combination table. Add a WIND1 combination with a factor 19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table. select DL1. select WIND1. select Envelope. 15 Under Case or Combination. enter DL+LL+WIND. 21 Under Case or Combination. 22 Click on the Load Combination table. select LL1. and enter 1. 17 Under Factor. 24 Under Type. enter 1. 14 Under Factor.5. select Ultimate. and click Add. 20 Under Factor. 506 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Add a LL1 combination with a factor 16 Click Add. 25 Under State. enter 0. and click Add. 12 Under Name.2.

3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ ■ ■ Under Copy from. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards.26 In the Structural Settings dialog. Click Check None. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Transfer Project Standards on page 507. Scroll down the list of items. Transfer Project Standards In this exercise. you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. select the file that contains the load table.rvt Importing load types and combinations from a previous project 1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. click OK. and select Load Types. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Transfer Project Standards | 507 .

5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. click Overwrite. 508 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 6 On the Structural Settings dialog. 4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click the Load Combinations tab.■ Click OK.

Documenting the Analytical Model on page 509. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. and creating an analytical schedule. you document the analysis by adding an annotation. expand Views (all). Documenting the Analytical Model | 509 . i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.The load combinations are displayed. click Tag ➤ By Category. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt Add annotation 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. expand Structural Plans. and double-click Level 2 Analytical. Documenting the Analytical Model In this exercise.

click Modify.4 Click the Area Load to place the tag. 6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. 510 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. under Category. and click View. select Line Loads and click OK. 8 In the New Schedule dialog. right-click on the Design Bar. Documenting the Analytical Model | 511 . Define the fields 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Fx 1 and click Add. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature 12 Under Scheduled fields. 11 Using the same process. 10 Under Available fields.Create a load schedule 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields.

i_RST_SAM3-in progress. under Structural Plans. double-click Ground Level .3. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save. 512 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .13 Click OK. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page 512. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F .Analytical. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins. Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software. In addition. For this reason.rvt Align the analytical beam 1 In the Project Browser. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software.

and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 513 .3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model. 5 Press TAB. 4 Press TAB. and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam.

NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project. You can save the open file if you wish. 6 Click File menu ➤ Close.The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. For example. setting both planes to level 2 as shown: ■ Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown: ■ Creating slabs and walls 514 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 7 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements. a new training file is provided. ■ Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on page 514. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software.

Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls. despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown: If a wall and slab are joined. the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown: If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets). Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 515 . it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members.

516 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog. Auto-detect tolerances 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect.rvt. and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes.If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model. They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. click Training Files. or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown: NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature. 3 Click OK.

click . and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure 3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. . 4 On the Toolbar. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 517 . 2 On the Toolbar. double-click Level 2. and draw a zoom box around one of the beams. 5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown. click as shown.Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans.

and on the Option Bar. under Analytical Model. select Top of Slab. 6 Click the beam. and then click OK.The dot located at the top of the beam. NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. 518 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. and then click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Vertical Projection. select Auto-detect. represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model. and on the Option Bar. click . for Vertical Projection. a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click the slab. For demo purposes. click . under Analytical Model.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 519 . 12 In an empty part of the drawing area. and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3. Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset 10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. double-click Level 2 . right-click. 13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown. and click Zoom in Region. 11 On the Toolbar. Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column.The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. click . represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model. The dot located at the top of the slab.Analytical.

Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types 17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. and then click OK. click . click (Join Geometry).14 Click the column. double-click Level 2. under Analytical Model. 18 On the Toolbar. select Auto-detect. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. and then select the column. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown. 520 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall. The horizontal projection plane for the column. The geometry of the column and wall are now joined. click . 16 On the Tools toolbar. select the wall. for Horizontal Projection.

19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 521 .

click . 20 Move the cursor over the lower wall. 21 Press TAB. and then click OK. 22 On the Option Bar.Notice the solid green lines are not aligned. These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. for Horizontal Projection. and select Chain of Walls or Lines. under Analytical Model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 522 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall. The dotted green line represents reference plane 1. select Auto-detect.

24 In an empty part of the drawing area. 26 Click the upper wall. select Plane 1. and click Zoom in Region. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. for Horizontal Projection. and then click OK. right-click. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 523 .The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown. click . under Analytical Model.

29 In an empty part of the drawing area. double-click Section 3. 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column. 524 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and click Zoom in Region. Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab 28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). right-click.The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1.

The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab. under Analytical Model. click . Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam. 31 Click the lower wall. and on the Option Bar. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 525 . 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click . select Auto-detect. for Top Vertical Projection. Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall 33 Click the slab. and on the Option Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall. select Bottom of Slab.The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. and then click OK. for Vertical Projection. and then click OK. under Analytical Model.

Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab. 526 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line). 36 In the Go to View dialog. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Analytical Slab Edge. under Analytical Model. click . 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). 38 On the Option Bar. and on the Option Bar. and then click Open View. 42 Click the lower wall. click . and then click OK. under Analytical Model. for Horizontal Projection. click No. click . and on the Option Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Auto-detect. select Exterior Face. 39 In the Element Properties dialog.Analytical. You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. select Structural Plan: Level 2 . and then click OK. double-click Section 3. 40 On the Design Bar. 35 Click the slab. In the Revit dialog. 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown.

click .The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall. for Top Vertical Projection. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. click . and on the Option Bar. select Top of Wall. Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection 44 Click the column. under Analytical Model. under Analytical Model. select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click the lower wall. and then click OK. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 527 . and on the Option Bar.

double-click Level 3. Close any additional open windows. double-click Level 3 . 51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 528 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .Analytical. Both windows will be visible in the drawing area.The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line). 52 On the Toolbar. Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam 48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 49 Enter ZF. and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both views as shown. click .

Press TAB. select Auto-Detect. Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam. and select the beam shape handle. click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views. Extend each end of the beam as shown. do the following: ■ ■ Move the cursor over the beam. 55 In the Level 3 window. and on the Option Bar. for Horizontal Projection. 54 In the Element Properties dialog.53 Click the beam. under Analytical Model. and then click OK. . ■ Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 529 .

530 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged. Boundary Conditions on page 531. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise. a new training file is provided. 56 Click File menu ➤ Close.

6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Analytical. 10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns. 11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point boundary condition. 8 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. and for State. click (Point Boundary Condition). 2 Enter ZF. 9 In an empty part of the drawing area. Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column 1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions. click Training Files. select Fixed. and click Zoom in Region. and click Zoom in Region. you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software. Boundary Conditions | 531 . 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. click Boundary Conditions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Apply.Boundary Conditions In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click View 1 . right-click. and then click OK. clear Structural Foundation. right-click.

and select the other symbol. and then click OK. 13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. for State. 14 On the Option Bar. 532 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 15 In the Element Properties dialog.12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown. press CTRL. click . under Structural Analysis. select Pinned.

Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol. 19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . 18 On the Toolbar. Add a line boundary condition to the footing 16 Enter ZF. 20 On the Options Bar. and for State. click Boundary Conditions. and draw a zoom box around the foundation. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown. 21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line boundary condition. click (Line Boundary Condition). select Pinned. Boundary Conditions | 533 .

a new training file is provided. some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure. click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. You can save the open file if you wish. or member addition. The application programming interface (API) starts. that you confirm in the analysis software. sections. are imported back into Revit Structure. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 535. Export the model to analysis software 1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. including structural plans. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software. member relocation. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software on page 534. For more information. 2 Proceed to the next tutorial. In addition. You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model. All views. 534 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion. the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it. In the next exercise. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. via an Application Programming Interface (API). elevations.22 Click File menu ➤ Close.

rvt.Exporting Revit Structure Files 15 Your Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. or schedule into AutoCAD. maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images. Exporting CAD Formats In this lesson. sheet. In this tutorial. etc. Export CAD formats 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D . Revit Structure. you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images. you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007. click Training Files. elevation. 535 .). Finally. which is imported into AutoCAD 2007. You can export a 2D view (plan. you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. section.Atrium. or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format. and open Imperial\i_RST_Export. expand 3D Views.

select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP Options.2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. Under Save as type. select a folder on your local computer. NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view. 4 In the Export Options dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. 3 In the Export dialog. Under File naming.dwg). click Short. The existing file name is automatically shortened. 536 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . do the following: ■ Under Solids (3D views only). select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. ■ ■ Click Options.

Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 537 . select AutoCAD Architecture objects. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. and click Open.■ ■ Under Prefer. 5 On the Export dialog. Click OK. click Save. View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007. 8 Navigate to the file location. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open.

11 In Revit Structure.rvt. and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element. click File menu ➤ Save As. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 539 538 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . Revit Structure columns. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress. 10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program.When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007. 9 Select a beam as shown. and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member. beams. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. the Revit Structure model appears as shown.

select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. 2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats.dwg). click Long (Specify prefix for all exports). clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2. expand Structural Plans. select a folder on your local computer. and double-click Level 2.rvt. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 539 . Under File naming. Under Save as type. Under File name. 1 In the Project Browser. i_RST_Export-in progress. 3 In the Export dialog. Click Save. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in.Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise.

rvt. the Revit Structure exported Level 3 Plan appears. 6 Navigate to the file location. View the 2D file 4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program. and click Open. 540 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . a warning dialog appears. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. 8 In Revit Structure. Exporting Sheets on page 540 Exporting Sheets Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007. i_RST_Export-in progress. 7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. 5 Click File menu ➤ Open. On the View’s export mode dialog.If the view was set to wireframe. click Hidden Line Removal. click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Proceed to the next exercise.

4 On the Export dialog. NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file. select a folder on your local computer.Export sheets 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or SAT files. do the following: ■ ■ Under Show. 3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog. click Save. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session. 2 In the Export dialog. Exporting Sheets | 541 . you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select. Under Export Range. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. and click OK. clear Views. Select each sheet.

On the View’s export mode dialog. 8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise. 5 Close the Revit Structure file. click Hidden Line Removal. a warning dialog appears.If the view was set to wireframe. 542 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. and click Open. If you wish to save the changes. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file.

they appear as shown.When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture. Exporting Sheets | 543 .

544 .

Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . thus the term family. however. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. Even though various types within a family can look different. 545 . they are still related and come from a single source. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. In this tutorial. exceptions to this rule. and when and how to use it. In addition. Using the Family Editor. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. The different file types become much easier to manage. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Walls. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. For example. There are. shape. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry. because there is only one file to track.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit Structure 2009 are “family based. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. such as a curved beam.rfa extension. In this lesson. and roofs are examples of these types of families. material set. You also learn about the Family Editor. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type. each with a different size.

has wall types that define interior. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. exterior. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates.Revit Structure has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. Standalone families include columns. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. foundation. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. but you cannot create new system families. and beam. Host-based families have components that require hosts. 546 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . while many more are stored in component libraries. for example. The basic walls system family. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of family templates. and partition wall styles. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. and roofs. generic. floors.

The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall. transfer them from one project to another. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. The following illustration shows an in-place step footing. You can load them into projects.Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families.rfa extension. You create in-place families only within the current project. and the category that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project. Introduction to Families | 547 . for example. custom step footing. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. and also a standalone pile cap family component.

4 Select the family file name and click Open. 2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. such as plan. you can drag it into the document window. Load Family command on the File menu. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. 548 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . elevation. In the final exercise. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. or 3D. To add a family to your project. and when to use it. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. In this section. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. After the family has been loaded in the project. how to access it. However. how to access it. it is saved with the project. you learn about the Family Editor.Add a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. or you can load it using the Load From Library. if you change the original family. you learn when to use the Family Editor. In this exercise. reload the family in the project to see the updated family. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family.

In this case. you can click File ➤ Open. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. create a component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. If you find a close match. 4 If you cannot find the component you require. modify it as needed.When to use the Family Editor During the design process. 9 Save the newly defined family. if you have exhausted your external resources. you will need a specific component for your design. and then load it into the project. With Revit Structure open. try to find the component that most closely resembles it. it opens within the Family Editor. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive.rfa extension and it opens Revit Structure in the Family Editor. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. To start a new family. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 3 Next. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 5 Finally. navigate to a family file. and click Open. select the appropriate template. such as newsgroups. There is a logical thought process to follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. Introduction to the Family Editor | 549 . 2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project. 2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. presume it is a bay window that you require. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. it will be available within the Type Selector. open it in the Family Editor. consider checking the Web library and other Web resources. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. It will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. you can double-click any file with an . When the family opens. and click Open. Within the Windows® environment. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch.

550 .

a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib. you create it within the project file. 551 . you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2009 Families. you create the following families: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ a custom metal deck profile. a custom titleblock. In the second exercise. a custom castellated beam. Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family. non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile. and an in-place family for a step-footing. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. Creating Custom Families In this lesson. not within the Family template (.rft) template for use in other projects. In the first exercise. When you create an in-place family. you create a custom. Using the installed templates.rft file). Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family In this exercise.

6 On the View Control Bar. Click Apply. select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. 552 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. click Dimensions and Reference Planes.rfa. 4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Zoom to Fit. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics.Open the metal deck family profile 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click. click Training Files. do the following: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and press DELETE. and open Imperial\Form Deck_Non Composite. Delete vertical reference planes 7 Select parameter wr as shown. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown. and then click OK.

Modify the angular reference plane 9 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. Click the angle. click ■ ■ ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows: Click the horizontal reference plane. click Dimension. Move the cursor inside the profile. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 553 .

16 On the View Control Bar. right-click. 17 Click the top and bottom dimensions.13 Select the angled reference plane. 554 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and drag them approximately as shown. 14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane. and click Zoom to Fit. 15 In an empty part of the drawing area. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale. Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile. and press ENTER. enter 66.

and add a dimension as shown. Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 555 . click Dimension.18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base. and press DELETE. Place new dimensions 19 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. 26 On the Element Properties dialog. 24 Press ESC. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile. click Ref Plane. 23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. under Other. Sketch the dovetail reference planes 21 On the View Toolbar. for Is Reference. Dimension and constrain the dovetail 27 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. 556 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar. click . select Not a Reference. and then click OK. 28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown. 22 On the Design Bar.20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as shown. click .

32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown. 30 Select the horizontal reference plane. These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane. click the dimension. and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane. and enter 0' 11/32". Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 557 . and press ENTER. 29 Press ESC. 33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown. 31 Select the dimension line.The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements.

click Lines.Sketch the dovetail 34 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split). Create parameters a and b 40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown. and click Delete Inner Segment. 36 Click Modify. 35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown. 558 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 Press ESC. trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. 38 Using the split tool.

click Label ➤ Add Parameter. under Parameter Data. 44 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Parameters Properties dialog. 45 In the Parameters Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. click Label ➤ Add Parameter.41 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. 43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown. enter a for Name. and then click OK. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 559 . enter b for Name.

Under Other. enter 0' 2". ■ Under Other. click Family Types.Define wr parameter 46 On the Design Bar. 48 Select the dimension as shown. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 49 On the Options Bar. and select wr. 51 In the Family Types dialog. enter 0' 4 1/2". for wr. select 2" X 6". click Label. Flex the new dovetail profile 50 On the Design Bar. for a. Click Apply. do the following. 47 In the Family Types dialog. and OK. 560 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types.

65 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. Create a new project 59 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. do the following. 61 In the Choose Template dialog. Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters. for b.rte. enter 0' 2". ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Undo). Under Family Types. 52 On the Toolbar. 62 In the New Project dialog. enter 0' 5". select Rename. 54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. Click Apply. click Browse. 67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. for b. Under Other.■ ■ Under Other. You are now in sketch mode. click the Imperial Library folder. for a. enter Form Deck_Non Composite_Dovetail. The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide. click Slab. and for File Name. Create new parameters 56 On the Design Bar. 64 On the Design Bar.rfa. for Sr. enter 0' 2 1/2". and enter 2" x 5". 68 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click Save. Under Other. and click OK. 58 Click File ➤ Save. click (Rectangle). and click Open. and then click OK. 57 In the Family Types dialog. click Lines. click Family Types. Click Apply. in the Imperial Templates folder. click Save the new profile 53 Click File ➤ Save As. enter 0' 2 1/2". Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 561 . 63 In the Project Browser. select Structural Analysis-Default. 60 In the New Project dialog. 66 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. 55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder. click OK. Under Other.

73 On the View Control toolbar. 562 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select 1" = 1' 0". double-click Section 1. For Model Graphic Style. and in the Type Selector. select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck. For Detail Level. select Wireframe. 71 In the Project Browser. 72 Select the slab.The slab is created. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. click Section. under Sections (Building Sections). 70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown. Create a section view of the slab 69 On the Design Bar. select Fine.

■ ■ ■ . 80 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. click Edit/New. 76 Select the slab. 79 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Under Structural Deck Properties. click Training Files. Click OK. open the file from the saved folder location. click OK. select the slab project from the available files. Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 563. The new profile is applied to the slab. 78 In the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If it is not. double-click Section 1. under Construction. Under Layers. select Edit for Structure. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Customizing a Castellated Beam In this exercise. click Load into Project. If there are multiple files open. select the new metal deck profile file. and on the Options Bar. 83 Proceed to the next exercise.Apply the custom family to the metal deck 74 Click the Window menu. click 77 In the Element Properties dialog. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. 75 On the Families Design Bar. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam.rvt. Customizing a Castellated Beam | 563 . select Layer 3. 82 In the Project Browser. for Deck profile. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_Beam. The file should still be open. and open the new family file. under Sections. do the following.

Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening. 564 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown. e2 = Space between voids (web post length). b = Length of sloped portion. ■ ■ ■ ■ e1 = Tee length. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the 2 Select the beam. click castellated beam. dt1 = Tee depth top beam. and on the Options Bar. click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. . .Modify the beam opening 1 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For dt1. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. and open Imperial\2D Rebar Shape Template. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 0' 3". For dt2. Sketch the rebar 3 On the Design Bar. Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters. enter 0' 6". For b. you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. and then click OK. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 565 .rft. enter 0' 3". Click Apply. enter 0' 5 1/2". click OK. enter 0' 4". Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. For e2. click Training Files. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For e1. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 565. click Rebar Lines. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction.■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout In this exercise.

click ■ (Draw). and draw a horizontal line to create the top surface of the rebar. ■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop. as follows: Click to the right of the vertical reference plane. 566 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .4 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line. ■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar.

6 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 567 . Place dimensions 7 On the Design Bar.■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop. click Modify. click Dimension. ■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch. 8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown.

11 On the Options Bar. 9 Press ESC. Create parameter labels 10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 568 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown. for Label.Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions. select B.

for Label. 16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown. select D.13 On the Options Bar. for Label. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown. select C. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 569 .

and click Save. 22 In the Save As dialog. 26 In the New Project dialog. in the Choose Template dialog. select B. 18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown.rte. Create a new project 23 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 19 On the Options Bar. click Browse. enter Square. select C. and click Open. for Label. 24 In the New Project dialog. 25 In the Imperial Templates folder.17 On the Options Bar. 21 Navigate to a folder of your choice. click OK. for Label. select Structural Analysis-Default. for File name. Save the new profile 20 Click File ➤ Save As. 570 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

click Finish Sketch. click Lines. The active rebar shape is highlighted. and click OK. scroll down the list of available shapes. 35 In the Load into Projects dialog. 31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. 37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. Launch the rebar shape browser 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. Sketch a slab 28 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. and select Rebar Shape: Square.rfa file is open. and be certain that the Square. click (Rectangle). Load the overlapping rebar into the new project 33 Click the Window menu. You are now in Sketch mode. 29 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. 32 On the Design Bar. If it is not. under Structural Plans. open the file from the saved folder location. positioned in the right-side of the drawing area.27 In the Project Browser. The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project. The file should still be open. click Slab. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 571 . The slab is created. 34 On the Families Design Bar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. select the new project. NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking Place rebar parallel to the slab on the Options Bar. click Load into Projects.

select Detail Level: Fine. 44 Select the rebar. 42 Click ESC. 40 Hover over the section view. 41 Click to place the rebar. for Placement Plane. select Near Cover Reference. select Rebar Bar: #10. 572 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .38 On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab. Modify rebar layout 43 On the View Control Bar.

click Modify. Creating In-Place Families on page 573. 45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown.rft) template. you start with an incomplete foundation wall. 47 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating In-Place Families | 573 . you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (.Notice that the rebar shape handles appear. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category. 46 On the Design Bar.

3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family In this exercise. Place the foundation wall 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Foundation ➤ Wall. 4 Click the foundation wall. 6 On the Options Bar. Create new family category 5 In the Project Browser. click . The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall. and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall. select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing . 574 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.36" x 12".rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_In-Place-Footing. click 3D Views ➤ 3D.

click Create. select Structural Foundations. and click OK. 10 On the Design Bar. and select the bearing footing as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 575 . 11 In the Work Plane dialog. 8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Make sure the entire footing is selected. 9 In the Name dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name.7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Sketch the extrusion 13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown. select Pick a plane. and click OK. 12 Press TAB.

click OK. 19 In the Materials dialog. for Depth. and then click OK. click . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Design Bar.14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Change extrusion properties 17 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. sketch a solid extrusion as shown. Copy extrusion 23 Select the extrusion. 576 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 22 On the Family Design Bar. for Name. 16 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only. click Finish Sketch. select Concrete . 25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown. click the value for Material. enter -3' 0". click Extrusion Properties.Cast-in-Place Concrete. click Finish Family. and select Multiple. 24 On the Options Bar.

26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown. 27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 577 .

31 Select the lower extrusion as shown. 578 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Join extrusion elements to the footing 29 On the Options Bar.28 Press ESC. 30 Select the wall foundation as shown. click (Join Geometry). and click Multiple Join. 32 Select the middle extrusion as shown.

Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 579 . click Modify. 37 Select the lower extrusion as shown. Join extrusion elements to each other 34 On the Design Bar. and click Multiple Join. click (Join Geometry). 36 Select the middle extrusion as shown.33 Select the upper extrusion as shown. 35 On the Options Bar.

580 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 40 In the Project Browser.38 Select the upper extrusion as shown. 39 Press ESC.

graphics. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet. The titleblock has linework.rft. and click Open. text. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. 5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. Creating a Titleblock Family | 581 . and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template. 2 In the New dialog. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. 4 On the Options Bar. select D . and enter -1/2" for Offset. and your project data. click Lines. and labels.36 x 24. The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. Sketch the inside border 3 On the Design Bar. click . Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock. You customize the titleblock with a new text style.

and click to draw a new vertical line. 12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown. 10 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown. . click . 7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and click . 11 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown.Add vertical and horizontal lines 6 On the Options Bar. 582 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click 9 Enter 0 for Offset. 8 On the Options Bar. and enter 4 1/2" for Offset.

17 In the Type Selector. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset. 24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 583 . 15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. while pressing CTRL. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. select the second and third horizontal lines. 19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 18 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. enter 3/4" for Offset. 25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. click Modify. and. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 26 On the Design Bar. select Title Blocks. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 14 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. select Wide Lines. 27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click Modify.13 On the Design Bar. click . 22 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. click Lines.

3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown.jpg. 2 In the Open dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 4 Zoom in on the logo. click Duplicate. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Name dialog.The titleblock linework is now complete. you add a company logo. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Text. click . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 11 Click OK twice. and select Bold. navigate to Training/Common. 6 On the Options Bar. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. under Text. and click Open. click Import/Link ➤ Image. and labels to your titleblock. enter 3/8" for Text Size. enter 3/8" Bold for Name. select Company Logo. 584 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create a new 3/8'' text style 5 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. text notes.

Press ENTER to add each new line of text. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 585 . 16 Draw a text box below the initial text.Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. and select the last text note. click Modify. in the text box. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. and add an address and phone number as shown. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. select Text: Text Note 1. and click outside of the text box to complete the text. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and drag the text note down as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the drag handle.

and select the consultant text note. select Constrain and Multiple. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. click . 24 On the Options Bar. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 586 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click Text. Add consultant name. 23 On the Edit toolbar. address. click Modify.

click Edit/New. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. click . and click OK. Create a new 3/16'' text style 28 On the Design Bar. and enter Sheet Number. click Duplicate. 32 In the Name dialog. enter 3/16" for Name. and click to specify the second copied text note location.26 Move the cursor down 4''. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 587 . 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Text. under Text. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 3/16" for Text Size. and click to specify the first copied text note position. select Text: 3/16". 34 Click OK twice. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 Move the cursor down another 4''. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock.

select Project Issue Date. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. click Label. and click OK. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field. 588 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 44 Select the left drag handle on the label.37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 41 On the Options Bar. and enter Checked By:. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and enter Drawn By:. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. and enter Date. The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines.

Create a new 3/8'' label style 49 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. click . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 589 . enter 3/8" for Text Size. select Drawn By. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 53 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 50 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 55 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. and click OK. enter 3/8" Label for Name. select Checked By. and click to specify the label location. 47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field. and click to specify the label location. 45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. click Duplicate. click Label. 54 In the Type Properties dialog.

58 In the Select Parameter dialog.Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 59 On the Options Bar. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Label: 3/8'' Label. click Center and Middle. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Project Number. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. and click to specify the label location. 57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field. 590 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Sheet Number. and click OK.

click Edit/New. select Client Name. select 1/16” Label. and click OK. so that they are all aligned. 78 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 71 In the Name dialog. and click to specify the label location.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. select File Path. enter 1/16" Label. select Project Name. 70 In the Type Properties dialog. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 73 Click OK twice. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. 68 On the Options Bar. 77 In the Select Parameter dialog. enter 1/16" for Text Size. 65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. Click Modify. click Duplicate. 75 On the Options Bar. and select any labels that may need to be moved. click . click Left and Middle. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 591 . Create a 1/16” label style 67 On the Design Bar. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. and click to specify the label location. click Label. under Text. 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. click Modify. Add Project Path label 74 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 69 In the Element Properties dialog.

Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. The titleblock graphics.rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. 2 In the New Project dialog. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project.79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock. 592 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Sheet. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. under Other. text. and select the titleblock. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. verify that default. click Load. and then click OK. Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. and labels are now complete. enter Name for Drawn By. select Training D-Size Titleblock. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 7 Click OK.rfa. navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. click . select it. click Modify. 5 In the Open dialog. and click OK.rfa file.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter 2005-01. enter January 1. enter In Progress. enter Office Building. For Client Name. enter Jane Smith. 2005. 14 Click OK. For Project Number. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 593 . This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. For Project Status. For Project Name. click Project Information.12 On the Settings menu. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.

594 .

placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 595 . Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure Adding Trusses to a Project In this exercise. bottom chord. and open Imperial\i_RST_Add_Truss. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2009. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord.Truss Building 18 In this tutorial. under Structural Plans. click Training Files. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select. Working with Trusses In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project. double-click Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. To use the Truss tool. you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing. and web members.

for Bearing Chord. click . 4 In the Type Selector.2 On the View toolbar. Under Dimensions. do the following: Under Structural. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. enter 6' 0". 596 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click . 7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span. click ■ ■ ■ . for Truss Height. click Truss. 9 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the model as shown. select Top.

Modify the truss 10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown. 11 Press DELETE. delete the extra flange at column location A1. 12 Using the same method.The truss is placed between the columns. Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. Adding Trusses to a Project | 597 . Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span.

15 On the View toolbar.Copy the single truss 13 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof. click (Copy). select Multiple. 14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps. under Structural Plans. 17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. 16 On the Options bar. 598 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2. 19 On the Design Bar. Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure 22 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View toolbar. under Structural Plans. 21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). click (Copy). 24 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. 25 On the View toolbar. click . select the remaining trusses. Adding Trusses to a Project | 599 .18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. double-click Roof.

and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown.26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. 31 In the Type Selector. 28 On the View toolbar. Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view 30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. . 600 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. click Modify. click Truss. click 29 Enter ZF. 27 On the Design Bar.

34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown.32 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . enter 6' 0". Adding Trusses to a Project | 601 . 35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown. for Bearing Chord. select Top. Click OK. Under Dimensions. do the following: Under Structural. for Truss Height. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.

36 Enter ZF. click 39 Enter ZF. . and D1.C4. 37 Using the same method. 602 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .D4. 38 On the View toolbar. add trusses between columns C1.

click shown . Adding Trusses to a Project | 603 . and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as 41 Select the flange at one end of the truss.Modify each truss 40 On the View toolbar.

■ ■ ■ 604 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . In the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. a new training file is supplied. and click OK. and repeat for the remaining trusses. 44 Using the same method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 45 Click File menu ➤ Close. Under Bottom Chords. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Truss. 2 In the Type Selector.rvt. Click OK. 6 In the Name dialog. 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. click Edit/New. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss. and open Imperial\i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters. Customizing Truss Parameters In this exercise. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Customizing Truss Parameters on page 604.500.500. for Structural Framing Type. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. for Structural Framing Type. for Angle. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Howe Flat Truss . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Short Span. Create a new truss type for the short span 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Under Diagonal Webs. click Training Files.42 Press DELETE. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. enter 90. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. click Duplicate. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click .

double-click 3D. click OK.8 In the Element Properties dialog. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . under 3D Views. 12 Using the same method. 13 On the View toolbar. change the remaining short trusses to the new type. click 14 Enter ZF. draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses. 11 In the Type Selector. Apply the new truss type 9 In the Project Browser. The truss changes to the new type. and then NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web.Short Span. Customizing Truss Parameters | 605 . . click select the truss as shown. 10 On the View toolbar. .

Roof Span. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. ■ ■ 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Diagonal Webs. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Howe Flat Truss .500. click Duplicate. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 In the Type Selector. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. for Structural Framing Type. draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses.Create a new truss type for the roof span 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click OK. click Edit/New. for Structural Framing Type. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 3D. and then 606 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click select the truss as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 20 In the Name dialog.500. Apply the new truss type 23 In the Project Browser. 24 On the View toolbar. . click Truss. under 3D Views. click . do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. and click OK.

NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange. 25 In the Type Selector. change the remaining long trusses to the new type. 27 On the View toolbar. Customizing Truss Parameters | 607 . . The truss changes to the new type. click 28 Enter ZF. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . 26 Using the same method.Roof Span.

Modifying the Shape of a Truss In this exercise. In the next exercise. and then select the truss as shown. Select all trusses 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 608. double-click 3D.rvt. 608 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. You can save the open file if you wish. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape. under 3D Views. click . a new training file is supplied. In the left pane of the Open dialog. draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure.

All instances of the truss will be highlighted. Attach the roof 4 On the Options Bar. Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 609 . (Attach/Detach Top Chord).3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances. click 5 Select the roof as shown.

View the custom truss 7 Select the roof. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile. In the next exercise. Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 611. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. 8 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown. click . a new training file is supplied. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 6 On the Design bar. click Modify. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 On the View Control Bar.The top chords. You can save the open file if you wish. and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof. 610 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . vertical webs.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Open Structural_Trusses. click the Training Files icon.rvt.Creating a Custom Truss Family In this exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. Sketch web reference planes 4 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the truss family 1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family. you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family. click Ref Plane. click Training Files.rft located in the Imperial folder. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 611 . and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family.

7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. 8 Using the same method. click Truss Top Chord. Sketch top and bottom chords 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown. 612 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern as shown.

Sketch truss webs 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown. 12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown. Truss Bottom Chord. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 613 . 15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown. click Truss Web.11 On the Design Bar.

17 On the Design Bar. enter Custom_Truss. navigate to a folder of your choice. select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. Save the new truss family 18 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 19 In the Save As dialog. Load the truss into the project 20 On the Design Bar. For Save as type. For File name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Save in. You are now in the project file. click Modify. Click OK.rvt. 21 In the Load into Projects dialog.16 Using the same method. 614 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click Load into Projects. select Family Files (rfa). and click OK. add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown.

double-click 3D. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown. double-click Level 2. 23 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. under Structural Plans.Place the custom truss 22 In the Project Browser. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 615 . click Truss. 27 In the Project Browser. 28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown. 24 In the Type Selector. select Custom_Truss. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss.

double-click Level 2. Create a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 616. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can save the open file if you wish. select Structural Analysis-Default. Create grids 5 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. 7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown. 616 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . a new training file is supplied. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools In this exercise. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. in the Imperial Templates folder. click OK. create column grids. and click Open. under Structural Plans.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. 4 In the New Project dialog. and a framing elevation. Finally. click Browse.rte. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Grid. you add braces to form the steel truss.

12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 70' 0" apart as shown.) 13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol. click Framing Elevation. 15 On the Design Bar. and place approximately as shown. Sketch horizontal reference planes 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click the dimension. click Structural Column. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). select W-Wide Flange Column: W10 x 49.Add framing elevations 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 Select each grid line. double-click Elevation 1 . 11 In the Type Selector.a. click Ref Plane. and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown . and press ENTER. Place support columns 10 On the Design Bar. 16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2. (The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. enter 5' 0". Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 617 .

18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first. 618 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click Ref Plane. 19 Click the dimension. 22 Press ESC.The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown. Place multiple reference planes using the array tool 23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown. and enter 15' 0". Place vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar.

24 On the Tools toolbar. Place top and bottom chords 28 On the Design Bar. 27 Enter 7 for array count. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. and press ENTER. 29 In the Type Selector. and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length. The array is complete. 26 Drag the array to the right. 25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 619 . click . click Beam.

Place braces 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. . 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the 620 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . When placing beams. 31 Using reference planes as a guide. select 3D Snapping. create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown. 33 In the Type Selector. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. create cross-braces by placing braces as shown. click truss as shown. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. Fix corner joint 35 On the View toolbar. click Brace.30 On the Tools toolbar. When placing braces.

37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace. click . 39 Select the vertical ref plane. click Ref Plane.36 On the Design Bar. 38 On the Tools toolbar. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 621 . and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown. then select the edge of the top chord as shown.

double-click 3D. View the truss 41 In the Project Browser.40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown. 622 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . under 3D Views.

You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial. 42 Click File menu ➤ Save. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 623 .The completed truss is displayed. 43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice.

624 .

and each option set can have multiple schemes. After you and the client agree on the final design. In addition. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can have multiple sets of design options. For example. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In this tutorial. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. Using design options. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 19 When working with a building model. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. At any time in the design process. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. 625 .

click New. you design each of the structural options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. TIP In this exercise. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. under Option Set. therefore. you can edit it. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After you create a design option. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. each is constructed for interchangeability. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. the roof and structure systems must work together. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the only available command is to create a new option set. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). The client has asked you to create various options. In the first exercise in this lesson. In the second exercise.In this particular case. each with multiple design options. click Training Files. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. make your final design decision. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you set up multiple design option sets. With the second option. 626 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .rvt. and delete the unwanted options from the project. 2 In the Design Options dialog. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. In the final exercise of this lesson.

8 Using the following illustration as a guide. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. click 12 On the Options Bar. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 7 In the Type Selector. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. and click Close. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. By selecting Multiple. and the third column centered between the two. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. In the following illustration. TIP To center the middle column.3 Select Option 1 (primary). the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. click Modify. click Column. click Edit Selected. 11 On the Edit toolbar. or add a dimension string between the columns. add three columns. In this case. select: ■ ■ ■ . You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. Creating the Structural Design Options | 627 . 5 On the View menu. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns.

16 Zoom in around the notch construction. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. they are difficult to see in this view. 628 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. click . using the same technique. Because of the size of the columns.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. A copy of the three selected columns is added. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. When you are finished. 18 On the View toolbar. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 17 Zoom out and.

and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 21 In the Type Selector. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. select Round Bar : 2".Notice the 12 columns that you added. you add the beams that span the columns. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click TOP OF CORE. Creating the Structural Design Options | 629 . 20 On the tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. Adding a beam is a two-click process. Zoom in on the upper right column. 23 On the Design Bar. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. under Floor Plans. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. click Modify. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. The first click specifies the beam start point. In it. Use the following illustration as a guide. Next. and click at its center to set the beam start point. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam.

select: ■ ■ ■ . click 26 On the Options Bar. click . 630 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and select the center of the column to add a copy. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.25 On the Edit toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 30 On the View toolbar. zoom into the left column. 28 Zoom out. and click the center point.

click New. select Option 1 (primary). Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click Rename. enter Brackets for New. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option Set. under Option. Creating the Structural Design Options | 631 . and click OK. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 32 In the Design Options dialog. 34 In the Design Options dialog. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Option. not a new option set. click Rename. click Rename. enter Roofing for New.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. under Option. 45 Under Roofing. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. enter Structure for New. 38 In the Rename dialog. enter Beam for New. There should now be two roofing design options. 33 Click Finish Editing. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. 43 In the Rename dialog. 36 In the Rename dialog. click New. click New. 37 Select Option 2 and. 40 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 46 Under Option. and click OK. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. and click OK. under Option. and click OK. 41 Under Option Set. click Rename. name the option Louvers. under Option Set.

select Beam. under Floor Plans. When finished. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 48 Under Option. 53 In the Project Browser. 52 Click Close. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. Under Now Editing. 50 In the Design Options dialog.47 Under Roofing. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. under Structure. 632 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click OK. This allows you to more easily manage the project. you create the second design option. click Rename. select Edit Selected. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 51 Under Edit. name the option Sunscreen. it will resemble the following illustration. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. select Option 2.

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. select Roof Beam.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 56 In the Type Selector. Refer to the following illustration. 58 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 633 . 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click Component. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Align. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Using the Align tool requires two clicks.

click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. on the Edit toolbar. 62 Select the beam and. The first click sets the move start point. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Modify. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.60 After aligning the beam. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point.

You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Finish Editing. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. 66 On the View toolbar.rvt. 67 On the Tools menu. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. i_Urban_House-in progress. click . Creating the Structural Design Options | 635 . 70 On the File menu. Notice that even before you close the dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. you need this file in its current state. and click Save.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. which is visible by default. 69 Click Close. 68 In the Design Options dialog. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. name the file. click Save As.

select Rafter 2 x 10. you set up multiple design option sets. Sunscreen. click Edit Selected. do so now. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. 2 On the Tools menu. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. expand Floor Plans. With the second option. under Roofing. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Under Now Editing. expand Views (all). This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. delete them after the rafter is in place. 3 In the Design Options dialog.In this exercise. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. you design each of the roofing options. 5 Click Close. The second roofing system. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. In the next exercise. each with multiple design options to pick from. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. select Louvers (primary). is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. 6 In the Project Browser. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. a Louver system. 4 Under Edit. open it now. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. click Component. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system.rvt. If you need to add dimensions. the other for beams. The first option. 10 Referring to the following illustration. 8 In the Type Selector. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. and double-click TOP OF CORE.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move To. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 38' 6" for Length. click . Select Constrain. click Array. 15 On the Edit menu. and click OK. under Other.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 637 . click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. Enter 5 for Number. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar.

you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. For example. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. rather than entering 3' 3". TIP When entering a dimension value. and press ENTER. The space separates feet and inches. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . you can enter 3 3. enter 3' 3". when the listening dimension displays.

click Modify. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1’. 27 For the array starting point. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. when the listening dimension displays. and click OK. under Other. select Louver 2 x 6. click the Edit menu. Select 2nd for Move To. and click Array. 20 In the Type Selector. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 With the louver still selected. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and. 22 On the Design Bar. Select Constrain. Enter 34 for Number. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click Component. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. and select the louver you just placed. click . and press Enter. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 639 .

click . 31 In the Design Options dialog. under Edit.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 30 On the Tools menu. The louver roof system is complete. 29 On the View toolbar. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Finish Editing.

The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. and double-click West. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. and then click Close. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. You will fix this in a later step. click . click Lines. Click OK. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 39 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. select Sunscreen. 41 Select the top of the left column. then you can modify it through the dimension. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. and the third point defines the arc. the top of the next column on the right. 40 On the Options Bar. Therefore. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. under Roofing. 34 In the Project Browser. The first two points define the ends of the line. 43 On the Design Bar. 33 Under Editing. 37 In the Work Plane dialog.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. In this case. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Edit Selected. expand Elevations. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 641 . Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. and click OK. click Properties.

click Finish Sketch. The louver roof system is complete. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. you need this file in its current state. Sunscreen. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. you designed each of the roofing options. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. click Trim/Extend. 49 On the View toolbar. The arcs should connect. 52 On the File menu. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. and then click Close. 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 48 On the Design Bar. 45 Click OK. Select the right arc. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. In this exercise. click Save. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. then the center arc. 50 On the Tools menu. The second roofing system. 51 In the Design Options dialog. a Louver system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.44 In the Element Properties dialog. The first option. click . 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. Under Constraints. click Finish Editing. 46 On the Tools menu. under Edit. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. Under Constraints.

If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. do so now. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. double-click Secondary Option. enter Primary Option. click the Design Options tab. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click Rename. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate. right-click {3D}. and delete the discarded design options. 4 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 5 Right-click each of the copies. you select a design. under Views (all). make it part of the building model. under 3D Views. secondary. under Views (all). 9 Click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. Managing Design Options | 643 . 7 On the View menu. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. 11 On the View menu. under Views (all).Managing Design Options In this exercise. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. After exploring the combinations. under 3D Views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. and click OK. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. click Visibility/Graphics. tertiary. double-click Primary Option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. under 3D Views. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. expand 3D Views. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. and last options.

and click OK. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 19 On the View menu. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View menu. 18 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under 3D Views. double-click Tertiary Option. and click OK. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click OK. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. double-click Last Option.

25 Select Structure. click Delete. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 33 In the Design Options dialog. Because the client has selected the design option. In your design options. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. since you no longer need them. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Yes. select Make Primary. 22 On the Tools menu. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. In this case. the beam option becomes part of the model. 29 Select Roofing. under Structure. Managing Design Options | 645 .At this point. 24 Under Option. 23 In the Design Options dialog. select Beam. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 30 Under Option Set. click Accept Primary. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. An alert is displayed. 26 Under Option Set. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 31 In the alert dialog. the current primaries are no longer options. click Yes. This was the client choice for structural. 27 In the alert dialog. double-click Primary Option. click Close. The set is deleted. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.

you selected a design. In this exercise.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. and deleted the discarded design options. After exploring the combinations. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . made it part of the building model. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Save. 35 On the File menu.

647 . you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. performance. In these situations. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. Comparison of alternatives on a site. In the final lesson. In this tutorial. modify their visibility.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. and manage the links throughout the project. This maximizes efficiency. You position the building models on the site plan.

you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry.Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. 648 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. and the other is a townhouse. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . You link two building models to the project. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.Linking Building Models In this lesson. modify their visibility. One building model is a condominium. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You position the building models on the site. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.

and save the file there. click Save As. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. RELATED See the lesson. and click OK. c_Townhouse. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. 2 On the File menu. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 649 . This option is grayed out. 8 Clear Read-only. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. and open Common\c_Site. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder.rvt. c_Condo_Complex. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 665. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. this option will place the link at a predefined location. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. click Open. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual .Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. Select c_Site.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. ■ ■ Manual . This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. with write permission. click Training Files. 5 On the File menu. click Open. Manual . Auto . however. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. All three files now reside. select the three files. Otherwise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. this system is not exposed to the user. 4 On the File menu. NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system. and click Properties.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.■ Auto . right-click. click Close. you can do so.

Origin to Origin. Notice the blue detail lines. 650 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. and double-click Level 1. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. expand Floor Plans. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.■ Click Open. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the File menu. expand Views (all). 13 Click Open. select Auto . 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.

The first click specifies the move start point. 17 For the move endpoint.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. 16 For the move start point. 15 On the Edit toolbar. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. The Move command requires two clicks. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 651 .rvt displays in the Type Selector. click (Move). The linked model moves as one object. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. After you specify the location to move to. After you select it. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.

The townhouse building model displays above the site model. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. For Positioning. and select c_Townhouse. select Auto . 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.18 On the View menu. 21 Click Open. 652 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.Origin to Origin.

To rotate an object. and click to specify the end of the rotation. click (Rotate). 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. click to specify the rotation start point. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.23 On the Edit toolbar. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. In this case. when the vertical line displays. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 653 . you first specify the rotation start point.

Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 654 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click (Move).The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration.

Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 30 For the starting point. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 655 .The townhouse is located within its required footprint. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. click (Copy).

NOTE After you rotate the townhouse.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. click (Default 3D View). use the Move command to make any adjustments. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 37 On the View toolbar. 34 On the Options Bar. click Rotate. click . enter Townhouse A. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity data. and click OK. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. for Name. 656 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 32 On the Edit menu.

you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click and hold Orbit. click (SteeringWheels). click Save. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. they were placed too low within the site topography. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. When you originally linked the files. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 657 . 2 On the SteeringWheels. In the next exercise. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. do so before continuing. After linking the files. you linked two separate Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels.38 On the File menu. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel.

and click OK. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project.rvt. In the steps that follow. To do this. When using the Align command. click (Align). you first select the plane you want to align to. 7 On the Tools toolbar. under Views (all). you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. Click the Revit Links tab.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. and double-click South. 658 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and click to select it. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. and click to select the line. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. and then select the plane that you want to align. 3 In the Project Browser. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. when it highlights. expand Elevations. In this case. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project.

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

12 On the View toolbar, click 13 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

15 On the File menu, click Save.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 659

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South. 2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>. 9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.

NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

660 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>. By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine. In this case, no detail level changes are required. 24 Click OK.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 661

Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link. 25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. 31 On the File menu, click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.

Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

662 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab. Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.

Managing Linked Building Models | 663

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should consider the following:

Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

9 On the File menu, click Save As.

664 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. When you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 665

When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

666 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK. On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When a Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and, when the edges highlight, click to select it.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 667

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■

Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.

6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile. 10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you have only two choices:
■ ■

Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Record the current position as a location. .

12 On the Options Bar, click

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to. Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as. Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Save locations 21 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.

668 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 26 Click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button, a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 669

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.

33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu, click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. 36 On the File menu, click Close. NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Training File

On the File menu, click Open.

670 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates. Click Open.

Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The current active location is Lot A. Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 671

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.

Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate. 3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu, click View Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click OK. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

672 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. 10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 673

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■

Family and Type Comments Cost

7 Select Include elements in linked files.

674 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

select Family and Type for Sort by. In this exercise. You have completed this tutorial. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. clear Itemize every instance. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. and then click OK twice. 13 On the File menu.8 Click OK. 12 Select Grand totals. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. right-click Door Schedule. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Properties. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 675 . expand Schedules/Quantities. 14 On the File menu. under Other. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. click Close. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. click Save. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.

676 .

you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. as well as a covered walkway. You create new phases. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. You create and manage 3 project phases. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. and create plan views for each phase. braces and footings) to phases. and then add new building model elements. and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria. assigning building elements to the appropriate phase: ■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. beams. demolish existing construction. a floor slab. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. footings. For the client. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. ■ ■ 677 . Using Phasing In this lesson.Project Phasing 21 In any project. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. the galleria. You create new phases. In the lesson and exercises that follow. In the second exercise. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. you work with a building information model that requires renovation. complete with schedules. In this tutorial. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation.

Existing phase Phase 1 (south) 678 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

The default structural project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. You create new phases for the project timeline. you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The finished sheet Phasing Your Model In this exercise. use phase filters to control what displays in each phase.Phase 2 (north) After you add phases to the project. Phasing Your Model | 679 . After you assign building elements to phases. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model. you create new phase-specific views. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work.

expand Views (all). the current phase linework is displayed as black. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. demo. if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline. 680 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. As you add new elements to the building model. or temporary) are visible in this phase. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. Verify the current phase is New Construction 1 In the Project Browser. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value. existing. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. 6 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. and the Phase Demolished value is None. under Phasing. click . This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties. while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. and double-click Floor.rvt. click Training Files. The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time. For example. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline. When you create a new structural project. In the Element Properties dialog. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. By default. 4 Click Cancel.

is visible in this view. existing earlier phases. expand 3D Views. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). and double-click 3D. and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. 11 Enter Phase 1 (south). 12 Under Insert. which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south). The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. and click OK.7 Click Cancel. you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view. With the phase Filter set to Show New. Phasing Your Model | 681 . demo. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase 15 In the Project Browser. Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall 14 Click OK. click the New Construction field. click After. Add and edit phases 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. 10 In the Phasing dialog. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south). There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing. click Modify to clear the command. on the Project Phases tab. and Phase 2 (north). so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. Phase 1 (south).

21 On the View Control Bar. The footings are hidden and cannot be selected. 20 In the drawing area. 682 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . and click Hide Object. 22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. right-click one of the rectangular footings. and click Select All Instances.19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown. click Hide/Isolate.

and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected. click Hide/Isolate. and click OK. under Phasing. and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 25 In the Filter dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. click . under Phasing. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing. select Show All for Phase Filter. 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. walls. Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed. click . This filters out the steelwork. The continuous footing foundations. Phasing Your Model | 683 .23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. select Existing for Phase Created. and openings. are selected and are displayed in red. 32 Click OK. 29 On the View Control Bar. 30 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. which are the building elements that comprise the existing building. as shown. clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. and click OK.

After you create the views. You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. and click OK. and the footings north of the galleria. the slab. it requires separate plan views for the Existing. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Because this is a renovation project. you modify phase and phase filter properties 684 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created.Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. the building is displayed as shown. Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. and Phase 2 (north) project phases. All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south). 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. Phase 1 (south) with demolition. the walls. You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north). click . 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 35 On the Options Bar. under Phasing. You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. 37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

double-click Existing. double click Phase 1 (south). and temporary) are shown in the same timeline. Phasing Your Model | 685 . Demolish the interior walls 51 On the Tools toolbar. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. which will include planned demolition. it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. 46 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north) Manage the phases for a view 45 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 In the View Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. Because of this time relationship. 40 Click No. under Phasing. select Existing for Phase. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. and click Rename. and click OK. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. 41 In the Project Browser. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Create phase-specific plan views 38 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Phasing. 48 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click OK.to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. enter Existing. right-click Existing. demo. new. select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value. 49 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. enter Phase 1 (south). 42 In the Project Browser. The line style of the new work. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Existing. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. In a phase such as Phase 1. 39 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. in phase 1. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. and click OK. shows as black. right-click Floor. 43 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. click . and click Duplicate. Because this is a phase-specific view. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. under Floor Plans.

under Demolished.52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. View graphic overrides 62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. click Filter 1. 53 In the Project Browser. The default phase filters are displayed. When you demolish the host. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. it is displayed as a dashed line. 64 Click OK twice. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 59 In the Phasing dialog. new or temporary. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing. under Phasing. you demolish all elements hosted by it. Create a custom phase filter 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. and Temporary. click the Phase Filters tab. 56 Click OK. 58 In the Phasing dialog. 686 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . and select Show All for Phase Filter. Demolished. The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray. 61 For the Filter Name. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. demo. As you click each wall. New. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. In this case. however. select Overridden. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. select the interior walls one at a time. Existing. double-click Phase 2 (north). Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. Demo Red. click New. under Floor Plans. and enter Demo Red. 60 Under Filter Name.

80 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 68 Click OK. 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. 78 Click OK. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. 82 In the Element Properties dialog. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. in phase 1.Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view 65 Under Floor Plans. under Graphics. 74 In the Element Properties dialog. Create phase-specific 3D views 69 In the Project Browser. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. under Phasing. Do this 3 times so you have 3 copies. Manage the phases for the 3D views 72 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. under 3D Views. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. 76 Under Graphics. which will show both architectural and structural building elements. This displays both architectural and structural building elements. and click OK. shows as black. The line style of the new work. Phase 1 (south). under 3D Views. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. 67 In the Element Properties dialog. Because of this time relationship. Because you changed the override. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. and Show All for Phase Filter. under Phasing. double-click Phase 1 (south). 70 Right-click on each of the copies. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. under 3D Views. The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. double-click Phase 1 (south). the demolished walls are displayed as red. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. 71 Name the views Existing. and click Rename. click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. 73 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Phasing Your Model | 687 . 79 In the Project Browser. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. 75 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. double-click Existing. Phase 2 (north). select Existing for the Phase value.

framing. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules In this exercise. and footing schedules for a single phase of a project. you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules. as well as 2 views of the building model. 86 If you wish to save this file. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red. The finished sheet 688 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . you create column. In this exercise.84 Click OK. 85 Repeat steps 81 . assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase.84 for the Phase 2 (north) view. you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation.

and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Click OK. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Phase 1 for Name. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 689 . Select Grand totals. select the following fields. Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south) 1 On the View tab of the Design bar. Click OK. click the Fields tab. Enter Columns . Click OK. 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Length for Then by. Clear Itemize every instance. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. 4 Under Available Fields. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. 7 In the New Schedule dialog. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and open Imperial\i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules. click Training Files.Phase 1 for Name. select Structural Framing. Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south) 6 On the Design Bar. You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Structural Columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Enter Framing . click Schedule/Quantities.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Length TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields.

Clear Itemize every instance. Clear Itemize every instance.Structural for Name. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. Enter Footings . right-click the new sheet. Select Grand totals. click the Fields tab. and click New Sheet. 17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Structural Foundations. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet. 19 In the Sheet Title dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK. 14 Under Available Fields. Create a sheet and then add views and schedules 16 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all).8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south) 11 On the Design bar. enter Phase 1 . Click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click Sheets (all). Select Grand totals. 9 Under Available Fields. and click Rename. 18 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 690 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . click the Fields tab. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. select the following fields. Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. select the following fields. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By.Phase 1 for Name. Click OK. click OK. Next.

expand Floor Plans.20 In the Project Browser. 22 Expand Schedules. drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. and click to place it. and click to place them. and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet. and move the column controls to adjust column width. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 691 . select each schedule one at a time. 21 Under 3D views. 23 On the sheet. drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet. In this exercise. and click to place it.

692 .

You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. Daytime rendering of the pool house 693 . Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 22 In this tutorial. you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model.

Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. After you create the perspective view. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. you specify options that define the model environment. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. When you complete these changes. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. the pad. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. and create the perspective view that you want to render. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. and then render a final exterior view. 694 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. add trees to the building site. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. In this exercise.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 695 . View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Pool_House.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

5 Under Construction.Teak. Solid.Teak. The Wood . click Properties). for Materials. so you can change the render appearance for the material. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The design calls for the use of a dark stained. select Wood . 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit/New. select the wooden screen wall. 10 On the Render Appearance tab. satin-finished teak. and on the Options Bar. Solid. click Replace. for Structure. verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood . 9 In the Materials dialog.Teak.3 In the drawing area. Solid material is currently a light stained teak. click Edit. 7 Click OK 3 times. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 696 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . (Element You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall.

and click OK. for the Structure [1] Material value. select Concrete . You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. You do not want the medium gloss finish. click Modify. click (Element Properties). click <By Category>. which is using a default material. and click Update Preview. and review the material patterns. for Structure. 20 Click the Graphics tab. click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss. select Satin Varnish. and on the Options Bar. for Finish. 16 Under Construction.11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 13 Click Update Preview. for Finish. but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish.Cast-in-Place Concrete. 22 On the Design Bar. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. and click . select the pad. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 697 . 19 On the Render Appearance tab. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog. select Broom Straight. 21 Click OK 4 times. click Edit.

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. review the material appearance (color and pattern). You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. Anodized . the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. select Metal . click Replace. and click OK. 698 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. enter Metal . click Aluminum Anodized Black. and click OK. 25 In the Materials dialog. 30 In the Render Appearance Library.Aluminum. and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. for Name. 29 On the Render Appearance tab. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog. click (Duplicate). You create a black anodized aluminum material. By selecting this option.Aluminum.Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.Black.

(Show Rendering Dialog). The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog. 35 Click OK twice.Aluminum.Black. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 699 . select Region. . 38 At the top of the Rendering dialog. Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar. select the Material value. select Metal . for Curtain Wall Mullions. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. 36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Anodized . and click 34 In the Materials dialog.

700 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly. and pad). the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image. NOTE The smaller the region.40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen. mullions.

The Rendering Progress dialog displays. for Scheme. for Setting. 47 Proceed to the next exercise. The higher the quality. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. Adding Trees to the Site on page 701. you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project. select Medium. Adding Trees to the Site | 701 . ■ ■ 43 Click Render. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. the longer the rendering process will take. on the Rendering dialog. 44 To display the building model. under Display. Several quality settings are available. Under Lighting. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Show the model. and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog: ■ Under Quality.rvt. select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun. after the rendering process completes. select Sunlight from top left.

In a later exercise. 702 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all). c_Pool_House_in_progress. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model. NOTE For simplicity. imperial components and units are used in this lesson. 2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway. expand Floor Plans. the RPC model is used in the rendering. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Site.rvt. but any type and size can be used.

as shown. right-click in the Design Bar. (Exact placement is not important. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio. similar to the locations shown. 4 In the Type Selector. near the walkway.) 6 In the Type Selector. See Loading Families in the Revit Structure 2009 Online Help.3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.Deciduous : Red Maple . click Site Component. select RPC Tree . select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project. they can be loaded from the Content Library. and click Site. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.30'. and place 2 trees in the project. Adding Trees to the Site | 703 .

25'. Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector. select RPC Tree . 13 Click OK twice. click (Element Properties). 704 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for New. and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees. and on the Options Bar.Deciduous : Honey Locust . for Height. enter Honey Locust . 10 In the Type Properties dialog.Deciduous : Scarlet Oak .7 In the Type Selector. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree. enter 18'. click Edit/New. select RPC Tree .18'. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.42'. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. and click OK. 11 In the Rename dialog. click Rename.

15 On the Design Bar. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View on page 705. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Perspective View | 705 . click Modify. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.

The perspective view displays. 706 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. click Camera.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt.

Depending on camera placement. as shown. Creating a Perspective View | 707 . With the camera shown. under Floor Plans. and select the crop boundary. If the camera is not shown in the view. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. and adjust the field of vision. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. in the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. double-click Site. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. and click Show Camera. as necessary. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard.3 Zoom out.

708 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Day to open the view. and click OK. and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.Day. right-click 3D View 1. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 709. enter Exterior . and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views.6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Save the file. double-click Exterior .

double-click Exterior . and render a daytime view of the exterior. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. You then duplicate the view.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 709 . modify render settings.rvt. under 3D Views.Day.

and click Render. 7 In the Rendering dialog. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. In this case. select Spring Equinox. and click Rename. 3pm. You adjust cloud settings as required. NOTE If a background image is required. under Background. for New. 5 In the Rename dialog. for Setting. 8 Under Quality. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. click (Show Rendering Dialog). for Sun. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. 3 In the Rendering dialog. enter Spring Equinox .Santa Monica. select Edit/New. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Lighting. You create a location and time for the rendering. 6 Click OK twice. select Medium. 710 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. select Sky: Cloudy.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar.

13 Close the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Structure session is open. click Show the rendering. click Desktop.9 In the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 711 . After the image is rendered. Click Save. 10 In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type.png). click Export. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Portable Network Graphics (*.

for Scheme. and click Move to Group. under Lighting. 712 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. add 30 :Sconce Light . To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Night. under 3D Views. click OK.Day view to Exterior .120V through 35 :Sconce Light . click New. right-click Exterior . 19 In the New Light Group dialog.120V to the Pool Lights group.Night. under Group Options. 24 In the New Light Group dialog.Day. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. enter Pool House Lights. on the View Control Bar. under Group Options.Flat Round : 60W .Night view open. 22 Using the same method. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . 27 In the Rendering dialog. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Flat Round : 60W . enter Pool Lights.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. for Name. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. press and hold SHIFT. click Render. To select a sequential list. select the first light. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.120V. verify that Pool Lights is selected. 16 With the Exterior . and click OK.Flat Round : 60W . under Ungrouped Lights. under Ungrouped Lights. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . you duplicate the view and change the settings. and click Artificial Lights. and select the last light. for Name. select Exterior: Artificial only. 25 Using the same method.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click New. and click OK.Flat Round : 60W .Exterior . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. click Dialog). and click OK.

Rendering an Interior View | 713 . After the image is rendered. Rendering an Interior View on page 713. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. In this example. 30 In the Rendering dialog. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. for Exposure Value. 32 Save the file. enter 4. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. you change the brightness of the exposure. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. click Adjust Exposure. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure session. under Image. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. and click OK.

you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. render the views. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view.rvt. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. 714 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and finally. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Adding RPC People In this exercise.

under Floor Plans.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. Exact placement is not important. click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. Adding RPC People | 715 . ■ (Rotate). 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 6 Select the figure. the person’s line of sight. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. and place the component inside the pool house. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. 4 In the Type Selector. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. select RPC Female : YinYin. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. By default. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. click Modify. 716 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar. In order to see the figure’s reflection. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 12 Click OK 3 times. you can enable this option.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. for Render Appearance Properties. click Edit/New. 13 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. click (Element Properties). under Parameters. 14 Save the file. select Cast Reflections. click Edit.

Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 717 . You define the interior perspective by placing a camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 717. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. c_Pool_House_in_progress. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. click Camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process.

select Section Box.The perspective view displays. and click Properties. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 718 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. under Extents. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

under Floor Plans. select the section box. in addition to the 3D view. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 719 . 9 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 11 In the 3D view. In order to accurately adjust the section box.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click Level 1. double-click South.

select the section box. right-click. 720 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. size the box as shown. size the box as shown. 14 In the 3D view. 13 In the South Elevation view.12 In the floor plan view.

you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and render the interior view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 721. To create a daytime view.15 Maximize the 3D view. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and curtain walls. doors that contain windows or glass. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 721 . you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. 17 Save the file.

Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. select Interior: Artificial only. and click Rename. for Scheme. 5 Click Artificial Lights. under 3D Views. click Render. you turn them off for this scene. and click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Lighting. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. 2 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Rendering dialog. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering.rvt. You can specify a lower quality. 3 On the View Control Bar. After these settings are established. for Setting. 4 In the Rendering dialog. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. select Draft.Night. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. click (Show Rendering Dialog). enter Interior . These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 722 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress. right-click 3D View 1. 7 Under Quality. clear Pool Lights.

11 Rename the copied view to Interior . The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect.Santa Monica. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view.Day. By default they are turned off. but the space will receive standard daylighting. In this case. The preset schemes are read-only. you must create a custom setting. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. 3pm. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For more information on daylight portals. select Interior: Sun only. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. click 14 For Setting. and click OK. select Region. For sunlit interiors. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. see the Revit Structure Online Help. and click Render. You create a view for the interior during the day. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. select Curtain Walls.Night. the daylight portals can be turned on. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. for Scheme. select Edit. for Daylight Portal Options. for Sun. 17 In the Rendering dialog. 13 In the Rendering dialog. select Spring Equinox . in order to turn on daylight portals. right-click Interior . 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. (Show Rendering Dialog).9 Close the Rendering dialog. click Copy To Custom. Creating the Interior Rendering | 723 .

you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. and on the Options Bar. (Element 724 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Properties). Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. under Image. For Saturation. In the next steps. 20 In the Rendering dialog. Click OK. enter 10. click Show the model. select the column on the right. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. and close the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure.18 In the Rendering dialog. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. enter 1.

select Unfinished. and click Render. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. add a bump map to create texture. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. the render time increases significantly. For Amount.6. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select High. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 23 With the column still selected. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select Wood. You change the varnish setting. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Based on wood grain. click OK. As size and DPI are increased.22 In the Element Properties dialog. For Rotate. 29 In the Rendering dialog. clear Region. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Printer. 26 Click Update Preview. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. for Setting. and click OK. For Width. for Resolution. 28 In the Rendering dialog. Creating the Interior Rendering | 725 . click the dimensions for Size. enter 90. under Output Settings. enter 5''. 30 In the drawing area. 24 In the Materials dialog. For Bump. Click OK. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select the crop boundary. and on the Options Bar. select Scale (locked proportions).

You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. or section view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. elevation.The rendered image displays. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 726 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. independent of the Revit Structure software. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. but you can also define it in a 3D. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. In a plan view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2009. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Usually. The walkthrough path is a spline.

NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise.rvt. and open Common\c_Townhouse. verify that Perspective is selected. and double-click 1st Floor. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. and change unit formats as desired. proceeds through the dining room. click Walkthrough. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and ends in the far corner of the living room. click Settings ➤ Project Units. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. click Training Files.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. If you prefer to use metric values. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Creating a Walkthrough | 727 . and click the tab in the context menu. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar.

Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. and double-click Walkthrough 1. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. click Finish. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. 728 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). for Width. enter 16''. 14 Click . 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. verify that Field of view is selected. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. on the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size. and click OK.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough. If it is not. and select the crop boundary. 12 On the View menu. Creating a Walkthrough | 729 . 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Click . 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). select the crop boundary. and for Height. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. for Frame. enter 9''. enter 1. 11 Under Change. 13 On the Options Bar.

press ESC. click (Element Properties). Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 730. proceed to the next exercise.rvt. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. click Edit Walkthrough. under Extents. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. c_Townhouse. double-click 1st Floor. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. clear Far Clip Active.The walkthrough plays. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 730 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the third key frame position. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. select Path. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. for Controls. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 731 . and drag it to the location shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.

If you are unsure of what option to use. shading. Recording the Walkthrough on page 732. under Walkthroughs. When you export the walkthrough. select <Shading>. double-click Walkthrough 1. The walkthrough is recorded. hidden line. . without opening Revit Structure 2009.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 3 Under Format. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. c_Townhouse. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the Options Bar. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. specifying the number of frames. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. enter 15. and click Save. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. reducing the size of the image. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. click Edit Walkthrough. for Model Graphics Style. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. under Output Length. 9 To play the walkthrough. shading with edges. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. or rendering. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. 8 If you want to save this exercise. for Compressor. and click OK. 732 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. and click OK. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. for Frames/sec. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds.

gutters. 733 . and low sloped roofs. shed. mansard. including hip. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. You do not need to create the work plane. Before you can sketch the roof profile. In addition. In this exercise. In this lesson. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this tutorial. gable. and soffits to the roofs that you create. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2009. you learn to create several different types of roofs. you learn how to add fascia.Roofs 23 In this lesson.

734 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Go To View dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. and open Imperial\i_Roofs. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 4 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. select Name.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and click OK. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. click Ref Plane. click Training Files. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 735 . centerline. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click the blue square on the witness line. and so on). To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2.

14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. 16 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 736 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Next. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. sketch the roof profile. 13 On the Options Bar.

press CTRL. click Modify. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 19 On the Tools toolbar. and double-click Section 1. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Next. 21 In the Project Browser.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and select the second wall. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 Select the edge of the roof. press TAB. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 17 On the Tools toolbar. Creating an Extruded Roof | 737 . expand Sections (Type 1). use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. expand Views (all). and then select the exterior face of the wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).

click Attach for Top/Base. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 738.24 On the Options Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click model. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 738 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.

You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. click Pick Walls. i_Roofs. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 5 On the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. and double-click Garage Roof. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof footprint. and click Yes. verify that Defines slope is selected. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 In the Project Browser. Next. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 739 . 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. expand Floor Plans.rvt.

8 On the Options Bar. 14 When you see the informational dialog. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 11 Press CTRL. 15 On the View toolbar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Defines slope. and click OK. under Dimensions. select both slope definition lines. By default. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click the model. 740 | Chapter 23 Roofs . and on the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. click (Properties). click Modify. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 741.

5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. click Pick Walls. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. press TAB. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Floor Plans.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. and double-click Level 3. expand Views (all). i_Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 741 . 6 Click to select all the walls. clear Defines slope. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. When you complete the roof. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Next. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. sketch the chimney opening. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang.

click Modify. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 Using automatic snaps. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines Slope. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 742 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 8 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. add new slope lines to the roof. 10 On the View menu. 18 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. Next. click (Rectangle). 17 When you see the informational dialog. click Finish Roof. 15 On the Options bar.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. 13 On the Options Bar.

close the roof sketch. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Next. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2. 7 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. expand Floor Plans. click Lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof.19 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. select Defines slope.rvt. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. i_Roofs. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. and click (Pick Lines). 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 743 . The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 743.

select the left vertical slope definition line. click Finish Roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. click Roof Properties. Next. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 14 Under Constraints. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. raise the roof 2' above the current level. Next. 10 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. and click OK. 11 To trim the first line segment. 9 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). 744 | Chapter 23 Roofs .8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. using the following illustration for guidance.

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Modify. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click (SteeringWheels). click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 17 On the View toolbar. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 745 . Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.16 On the View toolbar.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 746 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.rvt. Next. i_Roofs.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 746. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint.

and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Next. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. clear Defines Slope. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 8 On the Tools toolbar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. and double-click Level 2. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. Next. expand Views (all).1 In the Project Browser. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. press TAB. click (Trim/Extend). Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 747 . You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. you add a slope-defining line. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 10 To trim the first line segment. select the left vertical roof line.

click Finish Roof to complete the roof. click Modify. select Defines slope. and press ENTER. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. (SteeringWheels). 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). click 20 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. and double-click 3D. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. expand 3D Views. 3 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. expand Floor Plans. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 748 | Chapter 23 Roofs . i_Roofs. click Roof Properties. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. and double-click Level 2. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 748. 19 On the View toolbar. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. 16 Under Constraints. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 4 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all).12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 9 On the Tools menu. click Slope Arrow. you need to add two reference planes. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. Next.15 to add the second slope arrow.5 On the View menu. Before you can add slope arrows. click (Pick Lines). add two new slope arrows. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. Next. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 7 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. click Ref Plane. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 14 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. clear Defines Slope. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 749 . and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. To help locate the position of each split. click Modify. verify ■ (Draw) is selected.

The eave lines display with a dimension. the adjacent eave heights must align.rvt. click Align Eaves. enter 6'' for Rise/12". 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. When you sketch a hip roof. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then click OK. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. and click OK. on the Options Bar. and double-click Garage Roof. 1 In the Project Browser. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. select both slope arrows. select Slope for Specify. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit. expand Floor Plans. select Defines Slope. expand Views (all). Aligning Roof Eaves on page 750. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 5 On the Options Bar.Begin the tail at the right reference plane. enter 12'' for Rise/12". i_Roofs. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. (Properties). and click 19 Under Constraints. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 20 Under Dimensions. click Modify. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. (Properties). 750 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 18 Press CTRL. When eave heights differ. When aligning eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.

Creating a Mansard Roof | 751 . you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 751. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the View toolbar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 14 If you want to save your changes. select a method to align the eaves. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof.Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 On the Design Bar.rvt. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. on the File menu. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Finish Roof. click Save As. click Training Files. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise.

752 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Lines. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 7 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. and double-click North. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.1 In the Project Browser. (Properties). click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. on the Options Bar. 3 Select the roof and. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 6 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Elevations. Next.

and then select Defines slope. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click . and click OK. and select the remaining three lines. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Modify. 17 On the View toolbar. enter 3'' for Rise/12". click Save As. click (Pick Lines). click mansard roof. press TAB. Creating a Mansard Roof | 753 . under Dimensions. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 754. on the File menu. click Finish Roof. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.10 On the Options Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise.rvt. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add a roof to a building shell. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. double-click Roof. After you add the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Training Files. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 754 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans.

6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 755 .4 On the Options Bar. Because the walls are not continuous. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. 5 In the drawing area. click (Trim/Extend). verify that Defines slope is not selected. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 7 On the Tools toolbar.

8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. 756 | Chapter 23 Roofs . for Type. click Roof Properties. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Steel Truss .EPDM.Insulation on Metal Deck . Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. double-click the section head to open the section view.

but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. under Floor Plans. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 757 . 16 On the Options Bar.The roof has been created. click (Draw Split Lines). double-click Roof. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 18 Move the cursor down. In the next steps.

move the cursor horizontally to the left.You create a split line vertically down the center. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. and select a point on the opposite roof line. on the Options Bar. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. 758 | Chapter 23 Roofs . you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. Next. 20 Using the same method. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. (Add points).

click (Modify Sub-Elements). specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.In this exercise. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. enter -2''. for the dimension. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. exact placement of the points is not important. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. You modify the points individually. Layout tools in Revit Structure such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 759 . and press ENTER.

The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. 27 Press and hold CTRL. including the interior edges of the roof regions. enter 4''. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). click Modify. and press ENTER. 29 On the Design Bar. and select all of the roof edges. 760 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. for Elevation.

Creating a Low Slope Roof | 761 . under Construction. 31 Select the roof slab. for the Thermal/Air Layer. for Structure. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. In some cases this type of slope is desired. click (Properties). The slab has not responded exactly as intended.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. The entire slab is sloped. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. select Variable. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. 35 Click OK 3 times. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit. 36 View the results in the section view. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. By making the insulation layer variable. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer.

you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and Soffits In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the Options Bar. and soffits. click (Properties). 6 In the Element Properties dialog. gutters. and Soffits on page 762. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. and open Common\c_Condominium. click Training Files. Gutters. Creating Fascia.rvt. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.rfa. click Save As. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. on the File menu. 762 | Chapter 23 Roofs . and soffits in Revit Structure. you can easily create its fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. gutters. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 37 If you want to save your changes. Gutters. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. select Fascia-Built-Up. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Training Files. Creating Fascia. and click Open. After you create a roof. 3 Press CTRL. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.

Creating Roof Fascia | 763 . 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. Creating Gutters on page 764. 8 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. enter Built-up Fascia. under Construction. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

c_Condominium. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. under Construction. 10 Click to place the gutter. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Material. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name.rvt. and click OK. and click OK three times. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click (Properties). 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 3 In the Properties dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 764 | Chapter 23 Roofs . .Creating Gutters In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog.

Creating Soffits In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Roofs. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Soffits on page 765. expand Floor Plans. c_Condominium. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views. Creating Soffits | 765 . you learn how to place a roof soffit.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Roof.

and then select the soffit to join them. 7 On the Tools menu. expand 3D Views.4 Select the roof. and double-click 3D. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). click Join Geometry. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 5 On the Design Bar. 766 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 8 Select the roof. 6 In the Project Browser.

Creating Soffits | 767 . on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.

768 .

Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. After you create a model group. For example. Modifying. When you make changes to a nested group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you not only simplify their placement. You can also nest groups within other groups. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Creating. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. In another exercise. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you also simplify the modification process. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. you add the new model group to a previously created group. all instances in the building model are updated. In this exercise. or with those working on a different project. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. place. You mirror one instance of the group. the host group is also updated automatically. and typical office layouts. 769 . you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. By grouping objects. and modify repetitive units. hotel rooms. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. In this tutorial. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter ZR. 770 | Chapter 24 Grouping .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.rvt. expand Floor Plans. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click First Floor. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. expand Views (all). 2 Click in the drawing area.

enter Typical Kitchen. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 4 On the Edit toolbar.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. Creating and Placing a Group | 771 . and click OK. click (Group).

772 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. expand Model. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click Typical Kitchen. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. Creating and Placing a Group | 773 . and click Create Instance. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. under Groups. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.14 On the Edit toolbar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 774 | Chapter 24 Grouping . The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy.

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate). Creating and Placing a Group | 775 .

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. as shown. and one rotated. click Modify. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 776 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 20 On the Design Bar.

name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. and click Save. you make changes to an instance of a group.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Modifying a Group | 777 . click Save As. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt.rvt. When you finish editing. press TAB to highlight the wall. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click to select it. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.

8 On the Design Bar. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click member to group instance.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. 7 Click (Group Member.3 Click (Group Member. 778 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the element.). and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. and click to select the wall. click Modify.). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. press TAB. 4 Move the cursor over the door. press TAB. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.

and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. 13 In the Type Selector. move the cursor to the left. click Wall. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 11 On the Design Bar. click Door. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 14 On the Options Bar. Modifying a Group | 779 . 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance.

click Edit Group. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. move the cursor up. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan.16 On the Design Bar. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 22 In the drawing area. 780 | Chapter 24 Grouping . In edit group mode. click Modify. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. All other elements in the model are grayed out. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall.

28 On the group editor toolbar. which acts as the host. for Unconnected Height. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Nesting Groups In this exercise. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. you add the Typical Kitchen group. created in an earlier lesson. 25 Select the opening. enter 3' 4''. and on the Options Bar. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. (Element Properties). When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. Nesting Groups | 781 . click 27 For Base Offset. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. enter 7'. under Constraints. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click Finish. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Modify. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 4 On the group editor toolbar. under Floor Plans. 782 | Chapter 24 Grouping .Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. double-click First Floor. select the Typical Kitchen group. click Edit Group. in the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. click (Add to Group). Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary.

8 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 7 On the group editor toolbar. select the wall between the folding doors. double-click Second Floor.6 Press TAB. click Finish. and each of the bifold doors. under Floor Plans. Nesting Groups | 783 .

10 Click File menu ➤ Save. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. such as text. 784 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. and filled regions. In the next exercise. you add door tags to a group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. such as door and window tags.rvt. under Floor Plans. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements.

5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch. click to draw a rectangular region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Detail Group | 785 . 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region.

enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 12 Enter Tile. and click OK. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and on the Design Bar. as shown. 786 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. click Modify. click to add an arc leader.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 16 In the drawing area. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and select the text note and the filled region. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click Text. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. click (Group). 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model.

under Groups. and click Create Instance. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 787 . 20 In the Project Browser. expand Detail. 22 On the Design Bar. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. double-click Second Floor.18 On the Design Bar. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. Because the detail group contains variables. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators.

NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. clear Leader. 788 | Chapter 24 Grouping . i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Modify. under Floor Plans.manner that a drawing component can be added. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click First Floor. as shown. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

for Attached Detail Group Name. 11 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups | 789 . 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. click Check None.7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). click (Group). expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. select Door Tags. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags.

the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. and click OK. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click Place Detail. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. therefore. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. When you load the group from the library into a new project. click Modify. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 16 On the Design Bar. Training File 790 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.

8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. verify that Same as group name is selected. and click Save Group. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. accept the default template file. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. and click OK. In this case. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT).rvt. and click Save. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. verify that Project is selected. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 5 In the New Project dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. browse to the Desktop.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Create Instance. Saving and Loading Groups | 791 . right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. A warning dialog displays. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. for Create new. and expand Model. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. under Groups\Model. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. click Modify. and click Open. 3 For File name. click OK. expand Groups. click Desktop. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser.

792 | Chapter 24 Grouping .Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 24 In the message dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project. select the linked Revit model. and click OK. click Link. and on the Options Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 20 On the Options Bar. click Remove Link. verify that Attached Details is selected only. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. expand Revit Links. click Modify. 18 In the Project Browser. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and the link is removed. click Bind.rvt. When a group is converted to a link. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Use Existing. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 17 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click OK. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful